Home

LSIS STARVERT iS7 User`s Manual PDF

1. 18 Oht412 Gain SW Freg gets 0 120 Hz 0 00 x 5 38 x x o x x 19 01413 Gain Sw Delay Gain switching time 0 100 sec 0 10 x 5 38 x x o x x si2G Sensorless 2 2nd 0 No 20 Oht414 TD No o 5 34 x x x x x ViewSel gain display setting 1 Yes Variable ASR SLP Sensorless 1 2 depending 21 Oht415 speed controller 0 5000 on the o 532534 X O X X X Gaint proportional gain 1 motor capacity Dependent ASR SLI Sensorless 1 2 on 22 Oht416 speed controller 10 9999 msec o 5 32 x o x x x Gaint integral gain 1 molor capacity Variable gg ASR SLP Sensorless 2 speed depending 17 0h1417 controller 1 1000 onthe o 5 34 x x x x x Gain2 proportional gain 2 motor capacity Variable ASR SLI Sensorless 2 speed depending 24 0h1418 controller integral 1 1000 onthe o 534 x x x x x Gain2 gain 2 motor capacity Observer Sensorless 2 26 Oh141A Ee Reesor aor 0 30000 10500 o 5 34 x x x x x 27 0h141B Cee Soe 1 1000 100 0 o 5 34 x x x x x Gain2 observer gain 2 28 Oht41C Observer Sensorless 2 0 30000 13000 o 5 34 x x x x x LSis 13 6 Table of Functions ener m Note Communication Function Setting Initial Reference 1 Control address display range value page mode Gain3 observer gain 3 Variable Sensorless 2 speed depending 29 0h141D S Est P Gain1 estimator 0 30000 on the o 5 34 X X X X X proportional gain 1 motor capacity Variable Sensorless 2 speed depending 30 Oh
2. 00 Trip Name x Fault type display 01 Output Freq Operation frequency at fault 02 Output Current Output current at fault 03 Inverter State Accel Decel status at fault 04 DCLink Voltage DC voltage 05 Temperature NTC temperature 06 DI State Input terminal block status 0000 0000 07 DO State Output terminal block status 000 08 Trip On Time Fault time after power on 0 00 00 00 00 09 Trip Run Time Fault time after starting operation 0 00 00 00 00 10 Trip Delete Fault history deletion 9 0 No 1 Yes LSis 64 6 Table of Functions Config Mode CNF Reference page 00 Jump Code Jump code 0 99 40 01 Language Sel Keypad language selection English English 02 LCD Contrast LCD contrast adjustment 5 70 10 Inv SW Ver Main body S W version 1 XX 5 70 11 Keypad S W Ver Keypad S W version 1 XX 5 70 12 KPD Title Ver Keypad title version 1 XX 5 70 goes Anytime Para Status window display item 0 Frequency 0 Frequency 21 Monitor Line 1 Monitor mode display item 1 1 Speed 0 Frequency 22 Monitor Line 2 Monitor mode display item 2 2 Output Current 2 Output Current 3 Output Voltage 4 Output Power 5 WHour Counter 6 DCLink Voltage 7 DI State 8 DO State 9 V1 Monitor V 10 V1 Monitor m 11 Monitor mA 12 11 Monitor 26 13 V2 Monitor
3. 62 LSis 6 Table of Functions Control mode 21 185 kW Torque Boost 0 Manual 0 15 Oh110F Torque RE x Oo X x x x Boost Action 1 Auto Manual 75 kW 16 POM or less 9 Note orwar 15 ee n Oht110 Fwd Boost orgue boost 0 15 90 kW x Oo X x x x or 1 0 more 75 kW 5 or less 9 leverse 3 S 17 Ohtttt Rev Boost orgue boost 0 15 90 kw x Oo X X x x or 1 0 more 18 0h1112 Base Fre Base 30 400 Hz 60 00 x o o o o o qd frequency Start 19 0h1113 Start Freq 0 01 10 Hz 0 50 x Oo X x x x frequency Maximum 20 Oht114 Max Freq frequency 40 400 60 00 x olo o ojo Speed Unit 2 Hz Display 21 0h1115 Hz Rpm Sel Rpm 0 Hz o 538 o o o o o Selection 1 Display E Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that only appear when setting corresponding codes Note 2 DRV 16 17 only appear when the value of the DRV 15 Torque Boost code is Manual LSis 53 6 Table of Functions 6 2 Parameter Mode Basic Function Group gt BAS Communication Function Reference Setting range v v address display g rang page Lic F T T 00 Jump Code Jump code 0 99 20 o olo o o o o None Aux speed 1 vi 01 0h1201 Aux Ref Src gen 2 n 0 None x 51 532 o o o x x method 3 v2 4 12 o M G A 1 G A
4. LSis 33 3 Capstan Operation 34 Functional section Web break detection Int PID feedback Out Web break event 0 1 section Main Speed Command Section This is the same as section 2 3 Main Speed Command Section the main speed command section for the winder unwinder See section 2 3 Main Speed Command Section Web PID Controller Section This is the same as section 2 5 Web PID Controller Section for the winder unwinder See section 2 5 Web PID Controller Section Analog Output Section This is the same as section 2 8 Analog Output Section for the winder unwinder See section 2 8 Analog Output Section Web Break Detection Section This is the same as section 2 10 Web Break Detection Section for the winder unwinder See section 2 10 Web Break Detection Section LSis 3 Capstan Operation 3 7 Material Thickness Computation Section f iCurrent output i freq Hz p gt Main Sod i H Current output freq Hz Ing Main Spd X APPS2 Max Main Sod lNz ti X 100 x Thickness LPF Thickness Input Thickness En Yes Curr Thickness LPF On hold Thickness TD set Value ap Thickness i i i i i i i i i Thickness i i i i i i i Y Web Preset P1 P8 Web us A Preset um n ci Hold i Min Main Spd Web Hold P1 P8 Thick Web Quick Stop
5. 26 LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 4 Open Loop Tension Control Mode s d NNNM Speed m Feed back p out Ins im out The following table outlines the inputs and outputs for each section Functional secti Inpu Main speed command section B Out Main speed Tension command section E Outi Tension command Torque limit D E computation section Ini Current frequency Hz Outt Friction loss Int Current frequency Hz Diameter computation section In2 Main speed Outi Diameter In3 Web brake event 0 1 Ini Friction loss Final tension i i computation section In2 Diameter Out1 Final torque command In3 Tension command Open circuit detection In Final torque command section Outl Web brake event 0 1 LSis 27 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 3 2 8 Main Speed Command Section The main speed command is computed as a percentage and is conceptually identical to the flux mpm For example if you want to reduce the max flux from 800 mpm to 400 mpm you just need to set the main speed command to 50 400 800 x 100 96 The main speed command may be issued through a keypad analog input communication etc
6. Group Kia Function display Function settings Range ADV 65 U D Save Mode 1 Yes 0 1 w IN 65 75 Px Define 17 Up 0 48 A IN 65 75 Px Define 18 Down 0 48 IN 65 75 Px Define 20 U D Clear 0 48 Px P1 P8 P9 P11 option You can use the multi function terminal block to control acceleration and deceleration You can use this in systems where the upper lower limit switch signal functions as the deceleration command ADV 65 U D Save Mode If the operation command FX or RX terminal is off or trips or a power failure occurs during the constant speed operation the frequency used for the operation is stored in the memory The inverter uses the saved frequency when the operation command turns on again or returns to its normal status Use the multi function terminal block to delete the saved frequency Set a multi function terminal to 20 U D Clear and then input the terminal during a stop or at a constant speed to delete the frequency stored for the up down operation 65 75 Px Define Select the terminal to use for the up down operation and then set the relevant terminal functions in 17 up and 18 down If the UP terminal signal is ON when an operation command is input then the speed increases If this signal is OFF then the inverter stops accelerating and operates at a constant speed If the DOWN terminal signal is ON during operation the inverter be
7. Main Spd Src Web Quick Stop main See e Matn Keelt PI PB Off EPOD Keypad Lo EA Main speed h v2 yo e pi gt o 91 M Xcel Ir Rob SI onam LEO Bie E y Main Spd Main Spd AccT Disp Main Spd DecT Q Stop DecT 1 Main Speed Command Code Factory Group number Funct Name default Range APP 03 Main Spd Disp Main speed command Read Only display APP 04 Mainspaset Mainspeedkeypad Ooo 0 00 100 00 setting 0 Keypad 1 Vi 2 H 3 v2 i Main speed command APP 05 Main Spd Src method Vi 4 12 5 Int 485 6 Encoder 7 Fieldbus 8 PLC F 0 No APP 06 Main XcelT En Main speed No accel decel selection 1 Yes APP 07 Main Spd AccT Main speed accel time 10 0 sec 0 0 300 0 sec LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation Code number Factory Group default Function APP 14 Main Spd DecT Main speed decel time 20 0sec 0 0 300 0 sec Note 1 This code appears when Keypad is selected in APPO5 Main Spd Src Note 2 This code appears when Yes is selected in APPO6 Main XcelT En APP03 Main Spd Disp Displays the main speed 95 Displays the target main speed 96 when the inverter stops operating Displays the ramp time for the main speed when the inverter is operating APP04 Main Spd Set When you select Keypad in APPO5 Main Spd Src the main speed command input in this code activates the inverter APPO5 Main Spd Src You can
8. Note 1 This code appears when Keypad is selected in APP20 PID Ref Source APP17 PID Ref Value This code indicates the current PID reference as a percentage APP19 PID Ref Set You can set the reference for the PID controller using the keypad This code appears when Keypad is selected in APP20 PID Ref Src APP20 PID Ref Src This code allows you to select from a variety of methods to input the PID controller reference information keypad analog internal COM external COM and PLC option LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 Tapering Code Factory Group number Function Name default nge IN 65 72 Px Detine Multi function input 58 Web setting Taper Dis 0 None APP 58 Taper Sel Tapering Junction 0 None Al Linear selection 2 Hyperbolic APP 59 Taper SetPt Taper keypad 0 00 100 00 100 00 setting value 0 Keypad 1 Vi 2 n 3 v2 4 12 5 XV1 Taper value setting APP 60 Taper Source method 0 Keypad 6 XH 7 xv2 8 xl2 9 XV3 10 XI3 1 XV4 12 XI4 APP 81 Taper Spt Val TaPe setting value Read Only monitor n the center wind application the largest diameter produces the more stress towards the center of the winder The desired tension is the tension as a tangential direction This tension is caused by stress so the sum of these two vectors is the total tension Thus tapering can maintai
9. 5 39 5 Applied Functions 5 40 3 Code R number Function display Setting display Setting range APO 06 Enc Pulse Num 2 1024 10 4096 APO 08 Enc Monitor APO 01 Enc Opt Mode Set this mode to 1 Feedback APO 04 Enc Type Sel Selects how to transmit encoder signals Set this option according to the specifications included in the Encoder User Manual Select an option such as Line Driver 0 Totem or Com 1 and Open Collect 2 APO 05 Enc Pulse Sel Sets the direction of the encoder output pulse You can select 0 A B for the forward operation FWD and 2 A B for the reverse operation REV Select 1 to use the encoder output pulse as a reference for the frequency setting APO 06 Enc Pulse Num Specifies the number of output pulses for each revolution APO 08 Enc Monitor Converts the encoder output into motor revolutions and represent it in Hz or rpm BAS 20 Auto Tuning Select the encoder related options and set 3 Enc Test in auto tuning to operate the inverter up to 20 Hz in the forward direction Operate the inverter in the forward direction and then decelerate it before accelerating it up to 20 Hz in the reverse direction If the encoder functions properly the auto tuning item changes to None The Enc reversed icon appears if there is a fault in the encoder wiring If this occurs change the APO 05 Enc Pulse Sel setting or reverse two of the inver
10. ADV 20 Start frequency LSis 5 Applied Functions Detailed Description of Dwell Operations You can use Dwell operations to assure a certain level of torque for opening and activating the brake under a lift load When an operation command is input you can accelerate inverter in Dwell operation mode up to the Dwell frequency during the preset acceleration time You can operate the inverter using the speed setting after the Accel Dwell Time set for the Dwell operation frequency If a stop command is input during operation you can use the Dwell operation frequency to operate the inverter at a lower speed After the Dec Dwell Time you can stop the inverter according to the previous deceleration time If the Dwell operation time or Dwell frequency is set to 0 then the Dwell operation does not work The acceleration Dwell operation command is only effective when you issue the first command This operation does not work if the inverter returns to the previous acceleration path following the Dwell frequency acceleration The deceleration Dwell functions when you input a stop command and the inverter goes through the deceleration Dwell frequency It does not function during normal frequency deceleration which is not the result of a stop deceleration The Dwell operation does not function if the outside brake control is ON Acceleration Dwell The acceleration Dwell operation command is only effective when you issue the
11. Code number Function display Setting display 09 Control Mode 3 Sensorless 2 DRV 10 Torque Control 0 No DRV 14 Motor Capacity x Varies depending on the motor capacity kW BAS 11 Pole Number 4 BAS 12 Rated Slip Varies depending on the motor capacity Hz BAS 13 Rated Curr Varies depending on the motor capacity A BAS 14 Noload curr Varies depending on the motor capacity A BAS 15 Rated Volt 220 380 440 480 v BAS 16 Efficiency Varies depending on the motor capacity BAS 20 Auto Tuning 2 Rs Lsigma CON 20 SL2 G View Sel 1 Yes CON 21 ASR SL P Gaint Varies depending on the motor capacity CON 22 ASR SL I Gaint Varies depending on the motor capacity msec CON 23 ASR SL P Gain2 Varies depending on the motor capacity 3b CON 24 ASR SL I Gain2 Varies depending on the motor capacity CON 26 Observer Gaint 10500 CON 27 Observer Gain2 100 0 CON 28 Observer Gain3 13000 CON 29 S Est P Gain 1 Varies depending on the motor capacity CON 30 S Est Gain 1 Varies depending on the motor capacity CON 31 S Est P Gain 2 Varies depending on the motor capacity CON 32 S Est Gain 2 Varies depending on the motor capacity CON 48 ACR P Gain 1200 CON 49 ACR I Gain 120 For high performance operation you should measure the parameters of the motor connected to the inverter output Use auto tuning BAS 20 Auto Tuning to measure the parameters before initiating Sensorle
12. 3 Capstan Operation 3 2 than that of Capstan 2 to handle for the different lengths of web materials within the same amount of time In the operation of capstans we can establish Eq 2 1 1 by this principle This is similar to Eq 1 1 1 for the winder unwinder The Web PID controller controls the motor speed i e the output frequency of the inverter In addition to this the system computes and estimates current thickness of the web material internally and uses the current thickness of the web material computed in Eq 2 1 1 to determine ultimately the output frequency of the inverter This system offers more consistent control over the capstan tension than conventional PID controllers Since the internally computed thickness of the web material compensates for the inverter s output frequency once again the Web PID controller uses significantly less of the inverter s output frequency Therefore the Web PID controller does not risk saturating the output which significantly reduces the oscillation of the controller output Motor speed rpm Wire speed mpm Base thickness of materials m x Eg 2 1 1 Diameter of capstan x z m Current thickness of materials m The Web PID controller also offers the following functions Eliminates the transient phenomenon that occurs with the dancer or load cell at start up related code APP51 Maintains the tension and if necessary performs an
13. 3 8 Final Speed Computation Section ssssssssssseeeeeeeene 3 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS sinnar 4 1 APPLIED FUNCTIONS anea eana aaa ae ARASA P ADRE e KAAKAA 5 1 5 1 Setting the Override Frequency Using the Aux Frequency Command 5 1 5 2 Jog Operation Jog operating the Inverter ssssssseseeeee 5 5 5 3 Up Down Operation n nni ien trii pietre ri enint tegere opt 5 9 5 4 Wire Operation Operating the Inverter with the Push Button or Equivalent 5 11 5 5 Safe Operation Mode Using the Terminal Input to Limit Operation 5 12 5 6 Dwell Operation Operating the Inverter in Dwell Mode eee 5 14 5 7 Slip compensalion Operation ctii rne tetra tiia redi eaaa 5 16 5 8 PID Control 5 9 X Auto tuning 5 10 V F Operation Using the Speed Sensor 5 31 5 11 Sensorless I Vector Control eese nennen 5 32 5432 Sensorl ss Il Vector Cofttrol usrisiiiieni taii iniri ctn tinis ritiro iciat 5 34 5 13 Vector Control 5 14 Torque Control Controlling the Torque 5 45 5 15 Droop GOTFITO d der eite c t eee ttc aceti t de etie rl tide dee 5 47 5 16 Speed Torque Switchover sees tenentes 5 47 5 17 Kinetic Energy Buffering 5 18 Energy Saving Operation n e aa adaa a nnnnnen 5 49 5 19 Speed Search Operation icici cece dac a atid De ce rege ga eee fn Pe des 5
14. 6 Table of Functions 6 6 Parameter Mode Output Terminal Block Function Group gt OUT Control mode Communication Function Setting Reference v slv d address display range page Lic F uu 00 JumpCode Jump code 0 99 30 o o o o oj o 0 Frequency 1 Current 2 Voltage 3 DC Link Volt 4 Torque 5 Watt 6 Idss T lass 3 8 Target Freq Analog 9 Ramp Freq 0 01 Oh1601 AO1 Mode output 1 o o o o ojo ioni 10 Speed Fbd Frequency 11 Speed Dev PIDRef 12 value PIDFbk 13 Value 14 PID Output 44 15 Constant Web Spd 16 Out E 17 Tension Ref Analog 02 Oh1602 AO Gain outputi 1000 1000 100 0 o o o o oj o gain Analog 03 0h1603 AO1 Bias output 1 100 100 0 0 o o o o ojo bias Analog 04 Oh1604 AO1 Filter output 0 10000 msec 5 o o o o ojo filter A01 Analog 05 0h1606 Const i constant 0 1000 0 0 o 0 0 00 0 Y output 1 Analog 06 0h1606 AO Monitor output 1 0 1000 0 0 o o o ojo monitor 624 LSis 6 Table of Functions Input Terminal Block Function Group PAR gt OUT Communication Function Setting Reference address display range page 0 Frequency 1 Curren
15. The best choice for your best interests LSIS works hard to ensure that all our clients receive the best possible benefits AC Variable Speed Drive uz NW IIT TTL II INN IN INN IN NN IN SS SS SS U Lu SS SS SV SV SV SS SS SS SS SS SS NN SS Safety Precautions Please read all safety precautions before E using this product LS IS After reading this manual please store it in a location where it can be easily found www lsis com About This Manual About This Manual This manual discusses the specifications features installation operation and maintenance of the iS7 Web Control This manual is designed for users who already have a basic understanding of inverters Please read this manual before using your inverter to fully understand the performance functionality installation and operation of this product In addition to this please ensure that the end user and maintenance manager have read this manual LSis iii Safety Precautions Safety Precautions Safety Precautions help you prevent accidents and use this product properly Make sure you adhere to all Safety Precautions outlined in this manual There are two types of symbols used in this manual Warning symbols and Caution symbols These symbols indicate the following Precaution Definition VN Warning This symbol indicates the possibility of electric shock
16. BAS 15 Rated Volt Specify the rated voltage of the motor BAS 10 60 50Hz Sel Specify the rated frequency of the motor BAS 19 AC Input Volt Specify the input voltage DRV 06 Cmd Source Select how to issue an operation command DRV 01 Cmd Frequency Specify the operation frequency Now exit to the monitoring screen Now that minimal parameters are set to operate the motor use the operation command method set in DRV 06 to operate the motor LSis 5 69 5 Applied Functions 5 33 Other Config CNF Mode Parameters Function display Initial settings display CNF 2 LCD Contrast CNF 10 Inv S W Ver E X XX CNF 11 Keypad S W Ver X XX CNF 12 KPD Title Ver 2 X XX CNF 30 32 Option x Type None CNF 42 Changed Para 0 View ALL CNF 44 Erase All Trip 0 No CNF 60 Add Title Del 0 No CNF 62 WH Count Reset 0 No CNF 74 Fan Time 00 00 00 CNF 75 Fan Time Rst 0 No CNF 2 LCD Contrast Controls the LCD contrast of the digital loader CNF 10 Inv S W Ver CNF 11 Keypad S W Ver These codes display the OS versions of the inverter body and digital loader CNF 12 KPD Title Ver Displays the title version of the digital loader CNF 30 32 Option x Type Displays the types of option boards inserted in slots 1 3 CNF 42 Changed Para Displays only parameters that differ from the factory default settings when set to View Changed CNF 44 Erase All Tip Delet
17. If the frequency keypad setting corresponds to the main speed and the V1 analog voltage corresponds to the aux speed Conditions Main speed M setting DRV 07 Keypad frequency set as 30 Hz Max frequency Max Freq setting DRV 20 400Hz Aux speed A setting A BAS 01 V1 Expressed as an aux speed Hz or percentage depending on the computation conditions Aux speed gain G setting BAS 03 50 INO1 32 Factory default f 6 V is inputted to V1 the frequency for 10 V is 60 Hz and therefore aux speed A in the following table is 36 Hz 60 Hz x 6 V 10 V or 60 100 x 6 V 10 V based on these conditions 0 M Hz G A Hz 30 Hz M 50 G x 36 Hz A 48 Hz 1 M Hz G A 30 Hz M x 50 G x 60 A 9 Hz 2 M Hz G A 30 Hz M 50 G x 60 A 100 Hz 3 M Hz M Hz G A 30 Hz M 30 Hz x 50 G x 60 A 39 Hz 4 M Hz G 2 A 50 Hz 30 Hz M 50 G x 2 x 60 A 50 x 60Hz 5 M HZ Gl 2 A 50 30 Hz M x 50 G x 2 x 60 A 50 3 Hz 6 MIHZJ G 2 A 50 30 Hz M 50 G x 2 x 60 50 300 Hz 7 M HZ M HZ G 2 A 50 D AA ME E You can change the frequency to RPM so that RPM will be used in place of Hz 5 3 LSis 5 Applied Functions 5 4 Usage example 2 Main speed M setting DRV 07 Keypad frequency comm
18. 501 2 BASO1 50 Main speed command value Main speed command value x BAS03 x 2x BASO1 50 If the max frequency is high an output frequency error may occur due to an analog input error or calculation error M HZ M HZ G 2 A 7 M M G 2 A 50 40 M Main speed freguency command based on the DRV 07 setting Hz or RPM G Aux speed gain A Aux speed freguency command Hz or RPM or gain In the preceding setting types the single direction analog input can allow the Or operation at least four times BAS 03 Aux Ref Gain Controls the size of the input BAS 01 Aux Ref Src selected as the aux speed If you select V1 or 1 as the aux speed and specify the initial values for parameters 01 32 of the terminal block input group IN then the aux speed frequency operates in the following way IN 65 75 Px Define When you input a terminal specified as 40 Dis Aux Ref from the multi function input terminals the inverter only operates based on the main speed command and does not activate the aux speed command LSis 5 Applied Functions Frequency command using the DRV 07 setting method Main speed M Frequency command using the BAS 01 setting method Aux speed A gt Final command frequency When you set the multi function input terminal to Dis Aux Ref IN65 75 the aux speed command is not effective in operation Usage example 1
19. A Caution This symbol indicates a protective conductor terminal The symbols displayed on the inverter and in the manual indicate the following Failure to adhere to caution information may result in serious consequences depending on the situation The symbols displayed on the inverter and in the manual indicate the following Symbol Definition This symbol indicates a potential danger 4 This symbol indicates the possibility of electric shock After reading this manual please store it in a location where it can be easily ound Please read this manual carefully to ensure the safe and effective use of the iS7 Web Control LSis Safety Precautions Do not open the cover while the power is on or at any time during operation Doing so may result in an electric shock Do not operate the inverter while the cover is open Exposing the high voltage terminal or charging area to the external environment may result in an electric shock Donot open the cover even when the power supply has been switched off This excludes necessary maintenance or regular inspection Opening the cover may result in an electric shock even if the power supply is off The inverter may hold a charge long after the power supply has been switched off Do not conduct maintenance or inspection without first ensuring that the DC voltage of the inverter has been fully discharged To ensure this use a voltage tester
20. Brake engage 0 Max 2 00 x 576 o o o x x frequency frequency Hz o None E Save Energy saving 50 0h1332 Mode operation Manual o None x 549 O O X X X 2 Auto 51 04 0h1333 Energy Save pat 0 30 0 o 5 49 O O O X X Change 60 0h133C Xcel Change Acc Dec Time 0 Max 0 00 x ofojo x x Fr frequency Hz Frequency IE Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that only appear when setting corresponding codes Note 11 ADV 25 26 only appear when ADV 24 Freq Limit is set to Freq Limit Note 12 ADV 28 33 only appear when ADV 27 Jump Freq is set to Yes Note 13 ADV 41 47 only appear when a code value of OUT 31 33 is set to BR Control Note 14 ADV 51 only appears when ADV 50 E Save Mode is set to a value other than None 610 LSis 6 Table of Functions Expanded Function Group PAR gt ADV Communication Function Setting v address display range c M 61 LoadSpd Revolution 4 6000 0 100 00 o o o 0 x x Gain display gain o x 1 x04 Load Spd Revolution 62 imd display scale 2 X00 ixi o olo o x x 3 xooot 4 x0 0001 o rpm 63 0h133F Toad Spd revolution P 0 rpm o o o o o o Unit display unit 1 mpm 0 During Run 0 64 0h1340 FAN Control Cooling tan 1 Aways ON During o i o o o x
21. EE Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that only appear when setting corresponding codes Note 15 ADV 71 72 only appear when ADV 70 Run En Mode is set to DI Dependent Note 16 ADV 76 78 only appear when ADV 74 RegenAvd Sel is set to Yes 612 LSis 6 Table of Functions 6 4 Parameter Mode Control Function Group 3 CON Note 1 Control Communication Function Reference mode page operation Jump Code Jump code 0 99 75 kW 0 7 15 5 0 orless kHz fio 07 6 3 0 04 0h1404 Carrier Freq Carrier frequency fw kHz o 5 56 o o o o o 132 160 eti 3 0 KW 0 Normal PWM 0 Normal 05 0h1405 PWM Mode Switching mode Low leakage EUM x 5 56 o o o o o 3 PWM 09 oh140A PreExTime riti excitation 0 60 sec 1 00 x 5 38 x x o o o Initial excitation E 10 0h140B Flux Force amount 100 500 100 0 X 5 38 X X OlOlO 11 Oh140C Hold Time Continued 0 60 sec 1 00 x 5 38 x x o x x operation duration Speed troll 12 Oh140D ASR P Gain 1 SPeeecontioler 0 10 500 50 0 o 5 38 x x o x x proportional gain 1 Speed troll 18 Oh140E ASRIGain1 Pd Controller i5 9999 msec 300 o 5 38 x x o x x integral gain 1 Speed troll 15 Oh140F ASR P Gain 2 Peed controller 10 500 50 0 o 538 x x o x x proportional gain 2 Speed troll 16 Oht410 ASRIGain2 SPeed controler 40 9999 msec 300 o 5 38 x x o x x integral gain 2 Gain switching
22. IN 65 75 Px Define 22 I Term Clear 0 48 IN 65 75 Px Define 23 PID Openloop 0 48 IN 65 75 Px Define 24 P Gain2 0 48 The PID manipulates the output freguency of the inverter to control the flux temperature tension and other system processes APP 01 App Mode Application mode When set to No 2 Proc PID this code sets the functions for the PID process APP 16 PID Output Displays the current output value of the PID controller The unit gain and scale specified in APP 42 APP 43 and APP 44 are applied to the values before they are displayed APP 17 PID Ref Value Displays the reference currently set in the PID controller The unit gain and scale specified in APP 42 APP 43 and APP 44 are applied to the values before they are displayed APP 18 PID Fdb Value Displays the current feedback input for the PID controller The unit gain and scale specified in APP 42 APP 43 and APP 44 are applied to the values before they are displayed APP 19 PID Ref Set If the reference for PID control APP 20 is set to Keypad 0 Keypad you can input the reference value in this code If the reference is any value besides Keypad it ignores the value specified in APP 19 APP 20 PID Ref Source Selects the reference input for PID control the items in gray will be provided as options in the future If the V1 terminal is set to PID F B Source you cannot set V1 to PID Ref Source You can change the F B Source to anot
23. first command This operation does not work if the inverter returns to the previous acceleration path following the Dwell frequency acceleration Target Fra change Deceleration Dwell The deceleration Dwell functions when you input a stop command and the inverter goes through the deceleration Dwell frequency It does not function during normal frequency deceleration which is not the result of a stop deceleration 4 Dec Dwell time Target Freq Dec Dwell time I Dec Dwell Freq 5 Applied Functions 5 7 5 16 Slip Compensation Operation In induction motors the difference between the motor rotation speed and the frequency synchronous speed increases depending on the load factor You can adjust the speed difference slip to compensate for the load if this occurs If the control mode is set to Sensorless or Vector and V F PG the system automatically compensates for the speed difference Rotation speed Synchronous speed Slip A compensation Motor rotation control speed Load rate Code number Function display Function setting display DRV 09 Control Mode 2 Slip Compen DRV 14 Motor Capacit 2 on kw pacity Based on 0 75 kW BAS 11 Pole Number i 4 BAS 12 Rated Sli s rpm p Based on 0 75 kW P BAS 13 Rated Curr P 36 A Based on 0 75 kW 16 BAS 14 Noload Curr A Based on 0 75 kW BAS 16 Efficienc gt iG y Based on
24. respectively 44 Go Step Select the method for the auto sequence operation If you select Auto B as the AUT 01 code it serves as the movement command for the step 45 Hold Step If you enter the Hold Step terminal for operation with the AUT 01 Auto Mode set to Auto A you can sustain the final step If you select No 19 Step Pulse from the function items in OUT 31 33 the system produces the output signals as pulses when each step changes during the auto sequence operation The pulse width is 100 msec If you select No 20 572 LSis 5 Applied Functions Seq Pulse the pulse width is 100 msec when producing the pulse output at the last step where Sequence 1 or 2 ends Code number Function display Initial settings display AUT 01 Auto Mode 0 Auto A AUT 02 Auto Check 0 08 Sec AUT 04 Step Number 5 8 AUT 10 Seq 1 1 Freq z 11 00 Hz AUT 11 Seq 1 1 XcelT 5 5 0 Sec AUT 12 Seq 1 1 StedT E 5 0 Sec AUT 13 Seq 1 1 Dir 1 Forward AUT 14 Seq 1 2 Freq 21 00 Hz Repeatedly displays these as many times as the number of steps set AUT 01 Auto Mode Selects the type of auto sequence operation 0 Auto A If you enter a terminal set as SEQ L or SEQ M in the function items of the multi function terminal the operation automatically occurs according to the steps set e 1 Auto B Proceed with this step whenever you enter a terminal set as SEQ L or SEQ M and one set as Go Step
25. 4 Int 485 5 Encoder 4 8 LSis 4 Other Functions Code Factory Group number Fun Name default Range 6 Fieldbus 7 PLC APP 22 PID P Gain PID controller proportional gain 50 0 0 0 1000 0 APP 23 PID I Time PID controller integral time 10 0s 0 0 200 0 s APP 24 PID D Time PID controller differentiation time Oms 0 1000 ms APP 27 PID Out LPF PID output filter Oms 0 10000 ms 0 No APP 31 PID Out Inv PID output inverse 0 No 1 Yes APP 32 PID Out Scale PID output scale 100 0 0 0 1000 0 APP 45 PID P2 Gain PID controller proportional gain 2 100 0 0 0 1000 0 APP 46 PID I2 Time PID controller integral time 2 20 0s 0 0 200 0 s APP 50 PI Gain Ramp PI gain switchover ramp time 30 0 sec 0 0 300 0 sec PID output at start APP 51 PID Start Ramp 0 0s 0 0 300 0 s Ramp time APP 52 PID Hi Lmt PID output upper limit 100 0 APP53 100 0 APP 53 PID Lo Lmt PID output lower limit 100 0 100 APP52 0 No APP 85 Ext PID En External PID control selection 1 Yes 1 Yes APP 98 PID Samplet P D controller execution 1ms 1 10ms frequency APP01 App Mode Selects the Ext PID Ctrl External devices can use the PID controller built in to the inverter External PID Controller regardless of whether the inverter is operating APP85 Ext PID En Determines whether to use the external PID controller You can this
26. Control mode Communication Function Setting i Reference range 1 Lic F TIT Jump Code Jump code o o o 01 oh1301 Acc Pattern Accelerating Linear x o o o x x pattern o Decelerating Linear 02 0h1302 Dec Pattern pattern 1i S curve x Oo o Oo X X S curve 03 0h1303 Acc S Start aeri 1 100 40 x o o o x x start point gradient S curve 04 0h1304 Acc S End acceleration end 1 100 40 x O o Oo X X point gradient S curve deceleration m 05 0h1305 Dec S Start start point 1 10096 40 x OlO O X X gradient S curve 06 0h1306 Dec S End deceleration end 1 10096 40 x O o Oo X X point gradient 0 Acc 07 0h1307 Start Mode Start mode 0 Acc x O o Oo X X 1 Dc Start 0 Dec 1 De Brake 08 0h1308 Stop Mode Stop mode 2 Free Run 94 Dec x ololo x x 3 Reserved 4 Power Braking 0 None Selection of Forward 0 09 0h1309 Run Prevent prohibited Prev N X ojojojx x lone rotation direction Reverse 2 Prev 0 No 10 oh130A Power on Run Starting with the 0 No o z o o o x x poweron 1 Yes Tools DC braking time 9 Oh130C Dc Start Time at startup 0 60 sec 0 00 x ojojojx x Amount of 13 0h130D Dc Inj Level applied DC 0 200 50 x ojojojx x 440e Output blocking io oh130E De Block Time time beforeDC 0 60sec 0 10 x 5 o o o x x braking 15 Oh130F Dc Brake Time DC brakingtime 0 60sec 1 00 x o o o x
27. Refer to the following figure for each operation AUT 02 Auto Check Specifies the time when you enter terminals set as SEQ L and SEQ M at the same time When you enter one of the two terminals the system waits for a period of time to allow you to enter the other one If you enter the second terminal within this period the system recognizes the two terminals as entered at the same time AUT 04 Step Number Specifies the number of steps in the operation sequence According to the number of steps specified you can set items such as the frequency accel decel constant speed and direction for each step AUT 10 Seq 1 1 Freq This displays the operation frequency of step 1 For the 1 1 indicated in the message the first 1 displays the sequence type and the second 1 displays the number of steps For example when you enter a terminal set as No 42 SEQ 2 in the functions of the multi function input terminal the system starts the operation from the frequency set in the Seq 2 1 Freq AUT 11 Seq 1 1 XcelT Specifies the acceleration or deceleration time Sets the time period to shift from the operation frequency of the previous step to the frequency specified in AUT 10 LSis 573 5 Applied Functions AUT 12 Seq 1 1 StedT Specifies the time for constant speed operation at the frequency specified in AUT 10 AUT 13 Seq 1 1 Dir Specifies the rotation direction Output frequency AUT 14 Forward AUT 13 AUT 17 4
28. Selection of ae epee the switcl Speed speed 71 0h1447 pues search When 0000 x 550 o o o x x operation restarting 3 afteran interruption in instantaneous power When starting 4 with the power on 75 kW 150 i Speed ie bos less s 0h1448 sete zi 80 200 o 550 o o x x x Current reference 90 Current kW or 100 more Speed 73 0h1449 SS P Gain Search 0 9999 100 o 5 50 o o x x x proportional gain Speed 74 Oht44A SS Gain Search 0 9999 200 o 5 50 o o x x x integral gain Output ss blocking 75 0h144B time before 0 60 0 sec 1 0 x 550 o 0 X X x Block Time the speed search Energy 0 No 7 0h144D KEB Select buffering 0 No x 548 o o o x x selection 1 Yes Note Energy on Oh144E MEE buffering 110 140 125 0 x 548 o o o X x i start level Energy 79 Oh144F EOD buffering 130 145 130 0 x 548 o o o x x stop level Energy 80 0h1450 KEB Gain buffering 1 1000 1000 o 548 o o o x x gain goto zsp zero speed E 0h1452 Frequency detected 0 10Hz 2 00 o X x o x o frequency zero speed 83 0h1453 ZSD Band elected 0 2Hz 1 00 o 8 x x o x o frequency band E Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that only appear when setting corresponding codes LSis 917 6 Table of Functions Note 20 CON 72 75 only appear when CON 71 Speed Search is set to 1 or higher Note 21 CON 78 80 only appear when CON 77 KEB Select is set to Yes Note 22 CON 82 83 only appear
29. Speed M 6 JOG x o o o o o setting PTT P9 terminal D 28 0h1549 P9 Define function 9 Speed H A x o o o o o NONE setting P10 terminal 0 74 Oh154A P10 Define TT 10 Speed X NONE x setting o o o o o P11 S terminal 0 75 Oh154B P11 Define nction 11 XCELL None x setting 12 XCEL M RUN 13 Enable 2d 14 S Wire 541 15 2nd Source 16 Exchange 5 60 5 61 17 Up 5 9 18 Down 5 9 19 reserved 20 U D Clear 5 9 21 Analog Hold 22 Tem 5 19 LSis 621 6 Table of Functions Reference Coi Clear PID 3 Openloop 5 19 24 P Gain 25 XCEL Stop E 26 2nd Motor 5 58 Tiv Offset a7 Te 575 28 Tv Offset BER Hi 29 Interlock 1 E 30 Interlock 2 31 Interlock 3 32 Interlock 4 E Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that only appear when setting corresponding codes Note 28 IN73 75 only appear when an expansion IO board is installed Input Terminal Block Function Group PAR 3 IN Control mode Communication Function address display 33 Reserved 34 Pre Excite 35 Speed Torque 5 4
30. UW Spd d Close p Capstan o o W_Tens Close x x Selection ot UW Tens 0 xl 02 0h1802 Tnsn Ctrl Mode tension control Close W Spd x 22 92 o x x operation mode 5 w spd open Cle xix UW Spd 6 UG x x 7 W_tens Open x x UW_Tens a ban x x 03 0h1803 Main Spd Disp Main speed Read Only 28 ololo x x display me Main speed 33 0h1804 Main Spd Set command 0 00 100 00 0 00 O 2 8 O o o xX X keypad o Keypad 1 vt 2 Hn Selection of the 5 ae 05 0h1805 Main Spd Src main speed 4 12 1 V1 X 2 8 Oo o o xX X command method 5 Int 485 6 Encoder 7 FiedBus 8 PLC Selection of the 0 No 06 0h1806 Main XcelT En main speed 0 No o 28 o o o x x accel decel 1 Yes O7Note Main speed 34 0h1807 Main Spd AccT acceleration time 0 0 300 0 sec 10 0 O 2 8 O o o xX X No Leti Oh180E Main Spd DecT y Main speed 0 0 300 0sec 200 o ololo x x leceleration time ise Oh180F Web PIDEn Tension PID 0 NS 1 Yes o 247 o o o x x M control selection 4 Yes 16nete PID output on Oh1810 PID Output one Read Only 24748548 O OO X X 17 Oht811 PID Ref Value yg Read Only 24248528 O O O X X LSis 935 6 Table of Functions Reference Control mode 0h1812 PID Fbk Value PID feedback Read Only 24748518 0 0 0 x x monitor 19 0h1813 PID Ret Set PID simone 100 100 50 o 24248548 o o o x x Note 32 APP 02 99 only appear wh
31. Web Dis PID as shown in Table 1 5 1 Table 1 5 1 Selecting whether to use the Web PID controller APP15 Web PID En setti Status of the multi function Whether to use the Web PID input Web Dis PID controller Yes Off e Yes On X No Off X No On X APP16 PID Output Indicates the current PID output APP18 PID Fdb Value Indicates the current PID feedback APP21 PID F B Src This code allows you to select from a variety of methods to input the PID controller feedback analog internal COM external COM and PLC option APP22 PID P Gain Indicates the P1 gain of the PID controller If the P gain is 100 and the error is 100 then the P controller output is 100 APP23 PID l Time Indicates the 1 gain of the PID controller If the gain is 10 sec and the error is 100 then it takes 10 seconds to saturate the controller output to 100 APP24 PID D Time Indicates the D gain of the PID controller If the D gain is 10 ms and the error change is 100 then it takes 10 ms for the D controller output to decrease from 100 to 34 APP27 PID Out LPF Sets the delay time constant of the PID controller output In general this code sets the delay time to 0 ms to shorten the response time of the PID controller However a higher value makes the PID controller less responsive but more stable APP28 PID I Limit Indicates the output limit of the controller for anti windup APP
32. address display page State of the multi 41 0h1629 DI Status o o o oj o function output Multi 50 0h1632 Boon nein 0 100 sec 0 00 o o o o o o Delay output On delay DO Off Multi 51 0h1633 Delay ineton 0 100 sec 0 00 o o o o oj o 6 28 LSis 6 Table of Functions Commu Reference Control address page mode output Off delay Multi Qt Relay2 Relay DO function 0 A contact 52 0h1634 put NO 000 x o o o o o NONO Sel Sonet NO lect 1 B contact selection NC TripOut Fault output 53 0h1635 Onbly On delay 0 100 sec 0 00 o o o o o o TripOut Fault output i 7 54 0h1636 OfDly Off delay 0 0000sec 0 00 o o o o o o TimerOn TimerOn 55 0h1637 Delay Delay 0 100 00sec 0 00 o 571 o o o o o 56 0h1638 TimerOff Timer Off 0 10000sec 0 00 o s o o o o o Delay Delay FDT Detected 0 Max frequency 57 0h1639 regular frequency Hz 30 00 o o o o o o Detected 58 Oh163A FDT Band frequency it dd 10 00 o E 00 0 00 band Detected 59 0h163B TD Level torque 0 150 100 0 o x x o x o amount 60 Oh163C TD Band Detected 0 10 5 0 o 571 x x o x o torque width EE Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that only appear when setting corresponding codes Note 29 OUT 14 25 only appear when an expansion IO board is installed Note 30 OUT 3
33. from Sensorless 2 to Vector BAS 21 Rs BAS 24 Tr BAS 14 Noload Curr Indicates the motor parameters measured during auto tuning The default auto tuning settings appear for parameters that are not included in the measurement list 5 28 LSis 5 Applied Functions 2 Measuring the Encoder Connection Status When Using VIF PG SENSORED VECTOR Gade Function display Setting display Setting range BAS 20 Auto Tuning 3 Enc Test 0 4 APO 01 Enc Opt Mode 1 Feed back 0 2 APO 04 Enc Type Sel 0 Line Driver 0 2 APO 05 Enc Pulse Sel 0 A B 0 2 APO 06 Enc Pulse Num e 1024 10 4096 APO 08 Enc Monitor APO 01 Enc Opt Mode Set this mode to 1 Feedback APO 04 Enc Type Sel Selects how to transmit encoder signals Set this option according to the specifications included in the Encoder User Manual Select Line Driver 0 Totem or Com 1 or Open Collect 2 depending on the specification of the encoder iControl output diagram t i T Y E i 4 4 4 4 s veform Output wa t NPN 1 r Voltag te LSis 529 5 Applied Functions APO 05 Enc Pulse Sel Sets the direction of the encoder output pulse You can select 0 A B for the forward operation FWD and 2 A B for the reverse operation REV Select 1 to use the encoder output pulse as a reference for the frequency setting APO 06 Enc Pulse Num Specifies t
34. in APP55 Min Fixed PID the inverter functions according to the equation shown in Eq 1 7 3 By functioning according to the equation in Eq 1 7 3 the inverter prevents the output of the Web PID controller from decreasing the low main speed command below the value specified in APP55 Min Fixed PID Final PID output 96 APP 55 Min Fixed PID PID output 96 x 100 013 Eq 1 7 3 Table 1 7 1 shows the final PID output based on the APP54 Fixed PID En setting when you set APP32 PID Out Scale to 20 and APP55 Min Fixed PID 234 LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 to the factory default 10 This table assumes that the PID output is now saturated at 20 Note 1 of Table 1 7 1 shows that the main speed is 2 or 8 below the factory default of APP55 Min Fixed PID i e 10 so you can determine it using Eq 1 7 3 Note 2 shows that main speed is 20 or 80 over the factory default of APP55 Min Fixed PID i e 10 so you can determine it using Eq 1 7 2 Table 1 7 1 Comparison of PID outputs by PID controller types APP54 Fixed PID En Main speed APP54 Fixed PID En PID APP54 Fixed PID En PID command 5 output if Yes output if No p 2 0 20 0 2 9 8 0 20 0 2 oeen 20 0 20 0 4 0962 80 0 20 0 16 092 Final Speed Hz Computation n Fig 1 6 1 U1 96 equals main speed command 96 PID output 96 and is converted to Hertz Hz units as
35. input setting En APP 94 Tns Boost In Tension boost ooo 0 00 50 00 setting 0 Fixed APP 95 Tns Boost Type tension pees 0 Fixed yp d Proportional APP 96 Tns Downin Tension down oos 0 00 50 00 setting i 0 Fixed APP 97 Tns Down Type Tension down 0 Fixed yp 1 Proportional Tension Command Ramp Ramp may increase during the specified time tapering is applied or the final tension command is boosted downed You can send the final tension command with the tension command ramp applied to the analog output AO1 0 10 V voltage AO2 0 20 mA current In this case however the maximum value for the final tension command is 300 0096 Thus the AO1 Gain or AO2 Gain must be set to 300 0 Code Factory Group number Fun Name default Range APP 49 BID Bel if Tension command 5 0sec 0 0 300 0 sec RampT ramp time AO1 AO2 OUT 01 07 Mode Analog output 1 2 Tension Ref APP49 PID Ref RampT You can increase the ramp time when setting the time for the final tension command This code prevents the saturation of the PID output due to discrepancies between the command and feedback values when starting the machine and smoothes the initial start up of open loop systems LSis 215 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 5 Web PID Controller Section W Noise W Noise P W Noise P Band Gain Ramp lui gt SQUE ras ke compensation frequency Hz Web PID En Y
36. is crucial in determining the final speed command Hz of the inverter For more details please see the section 1 7 concerning final Speed computations APP61 Curr Diameter Indicates the diameter of the current bobbin 96 After switching multi function input Web Preset from On Off the diameter 96 of the selected bobbin appears The diameter computed in Eq 1 6 3 is updated during operation APP67 Min Diameter When selecting the input value of APP70 with the Keypad enter the ratio of the empty bobbin diameter to the bobbin diameter when fully wrapped with material If there are a variety of bobbins available as shown in Fig 1 6 1 enter the ratio 96 of the minimum diameter of the smallest bobbin to the maximum diameter of the largest bobbin In cases such as the one shown in Fig 1 6 1 enter 14 2 in APP67 Min Diameter APP68 Diameter LPF Selects the delay time constant of the diameter 96 computation Usually set as traverse reciprocating time APP70 MinDia Source This code allows you to select from a variety of methods to enter the minimum bobbin diameter value e g keypad analog extended analog input APP75 MinDia Value Indicates the minimum bobbin diameter value 96 APP92 Max Main Spd When the main diameter command is 100 enter the maximum speed Hz for the empty diameter of the smallest bobbin In this example the empty diameter of the smallest bobbin is 0 1 m 100 mm as
37. 0h0313 Motor feedback speed 0 RPM 32768 rpm 32767 rpm with directionality 0h0314 Output voltage 1 vl 0h0315 DC Link Voltage 1 vl 0h0316 Output power 01 w 0h0317 Output torque 01 0h0318 PID reference 0 1 0h0319 PID feedback 01 oggi Display the umber of lt Display the number of poles for the 1st motor poles for the 1st motor Display the number of 0h0S1B poles for the 2nd motor Display the number of poles for the 2nd motor Display the number of ohosic poles for the selected Display the number of poles for the selected motor motor Oh031D Select Hz rpm S Oe unk 1 rpm unit Oh031E Reserved F is Oh031F 72 LSis 7 iS7 Communication Common Areas Communic ation Parameter Scale Unit Assigned content by bit Address BIS Reserved BI4 Reserved BIS Reserved BI2 Reserved Bl Reserved BIO P11 Expansion 1 0 B9 P10 Expansion I O hoad Digital input B8 P9 Expansion I O information B7 P8 Basic I O B6 P7 Basic VO B5 P6 Basic O B4 P5 Basic VO B3 P4 Basic VO B2 P3 Basic I O B1 P2 Basic VO BO P1 Basic I O BIS Reserved BI4 Reserved BIS Reserved BI2 Reserved Bl Reserved BIO Reserved B9 Reserved Digital Output _ B8 Reserved information B7 Reserved B6 Reserved B5 Q4 Expansion 1 0 B4 Q3 Expansion
38. 0h1720 Para Stauts 2 Communications 0000 FFFF ooog o x o o o o o 33 0h1721 Para Stauts 3 Communications 0000 FFFF gogF o o o o o o 34 0h1722 Para Stauts 4 Communications O000 FFFF goo o o o o o o 35 0h1723 Para Stauts 5 Communications 0000 FFFF gogo o o o o o o 36 0h1724 Para Stauts 6 Communications 0000 FFFF ooog o o o o o o 37 0h1725 Para Stauts 7 Communications O000 FFFF goo o S o o o o o 38 0h1726 Para Stauts 8 Communications O000 FFFF gogo o 3 o o o o o address 8 Hex 39 0h1727 Para Stauts 9 Communications O000 FFFF gogo o P o o o o o address 9 Hex 40 0h1728 Para Stauts Communications 0000 FFFF 0000 O ojojojojo 6 30 LSIS 6 Table of Functions 10 address 10 Hex 4 0h1729 Para Stauts Communications 0000 FFFF o00F o oo olo 11 address 11 Hex Communication address Function display Setting range Reference v F o o EN 42 0h172A Para Stauts 12 Communications 0000 FFFF poop o o address 12 Hex 43 0h1728 Para Stauts 13 Communications 0000 FFFF ggg o o o o o address 13 Hex Communications 0000 FFFF 44 0h172C Para Stauts 14 address 14 Hex 0000 ojojojojo 45 0h172D Para Stauts 15 Communications 0000 FFFF gogo o o o o o address 15 Hex 46 0h172E Para Stauts 16 Communicati
39. 2 M G A 3 M M G A Aux speed MEER c 0h1202 Aux Cale command NEC e x 54 Oo 0lox x Notes ee motion 5 mGa 0 MG E selection 5096 e MGA 50 Meer A 50 Aux Rei AUX speed 03 0h1203 Gain command 200 0 200 0 100 0 o 54 Oo 0lo x x gain o Keypad Second FXRt operation 2 Fx Rx 2 04 0h1204 Cmd 2nd Src 1 XI o o o o o o command 3 Int 485 method 4 FieldBus 5 PLC Second 05 0h1205 Freq 2nd Src bere 0 Keypad 1 Mekas o A o olox x method 55 Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that only appear when setting corresponding codes Note 3 The BAS 02 and 03 codes cannot be displayed if the value of the BAS 01 Aux Ref Src code is NONE 64 LSis 6 Table of Functions Basic Function Group PAR gt BAS Control mode Communication Function Setting Initial Reference S address display range value page Lic F TIT 21 F Rs Stator resistor Depends onthe x 525 x o o o o motor setting Leakage Depends on the 2 Lsigma inductance motor setting zi x 5 25 x o o0 o 0 m is Stator Depends onthe _ x PE l l le S inductance motor setting Note 4 Rotor time 24 Tr Constant 25 5000msec x 5 25 x o o o o 41e s 0h1229 User Freq 1 User 0 Max 15 00 x o x x x x frequency 1 frequency Hz 42 0h122A User Volt 1_ User voltage 1 0
40. 203d apon ddw doojuedo ld 8d 1d Bumes IEU u8 ndu uoroung ninw ae Kou8nbeu wu sadan Old esieAu uleg ino Old 12919 wua I 8d71d Bu ues euru Indu uopouny ninyy Pc Zd 8d Ld Bumes yeuuisey pue uonounj nini ure paa pIEMO Old 8 4 Qld 1913S uen I uzo fsmpisrT d ser iul 5929999799 uUa d opu uoneles 8 4 Old I 3 29999999997 pean PERI 1 ped oy Duties ja Old LSis 5 22 5 Applied Functions When the PID switching operation switching from PID operation to general operation is inputted to the multi function input P1 P11 the percentage values are converted to hertz values before they are outputted The polarity of the normal PID output PID OUT is unidirectional and limited by APP 29 PID Limit Hi and APP 30 PID Limit Lo 100 0 is based on the DRV 20 maxFreq value 3 Pre PID Operation You can use this function when an operation command is inputted to activate the inverter in general acceleration to set the frequency without starting a PID operation You can start the PID operation once the control volume increases to a certain level APP 34 Pre PID Freq This code allows you to input a frequency up to the general acceleration if you need general acceleration without PID control For instan
41. 215 o o o x x In setting o Fixed 95 Oh185F Tns Boost Tension boost type 0 x 215 o o o x x Type 1 Proportional Fixed 96 0h1860 Ths Down Tension down 0 50 00 0 00 o 215 o o o x x In setting o Fixed 97 0h1861 Tns Down Tension down type 0 x 215 o o o x x Type 1 Proportional Fixed 98 0h1862 PID Sample PIP euius 1 10 ms 1 x 24749 O O O X X T cycle 99 0h1863 Web SW Dedicated S W Read Only 1 xx E o olo x x Ver version Note 40 APP 93 only appears when APP02 Tnsn Ctrl Mode is set to a mode other than Capstan Note 41 It only appears when the APP 02 Tnsn Ctrl Mode is set to W_Spd Close UW Spd Close W Tens Close UW Tens Close and Capstan 6 40 LSis 6 Table of Functions 6 9 Parameter Mode Application Function Group 2 3 AP2 Control mode Communication Function Setting durin Reference S address display range Braka page Lic F T T 00 Jump Code Jump code 0 99 10 o ololololo Selection of web 0 No goo without the 3 2 32 2 36 do 0h1950 DiaDisMode diameter 4 ves No x oa o o x x calculation Initial value of ot Dia Comp the diameter m 0h1951 e compensation 07 900 0 100 0 o 2 48 olojo x x gain Diameter 82 0h1952 ra compensation Read Only 25 248 o o o x x gain monitor Diacomp PID output value g 83 0h1953 Fidler fercalculation oo c 10 00 o 2 48 oloj
42. 220 v BAS 16 Efficiency 72 BAS 20 Auto Tuning 0 None BAS 21 Rs 7 26 00 Q BAS 22 Lsigma gt 179 4 mH BAS 23 Ls 1544 mH BAS 24 T E 145 msec APO 04 Enc Opt Mode 0 None 2 Be sure to perform auto tuning after the motor stops Before auto tuning input the number of motor poles rated slip rated current rated voltage and efficiency stated on the motor nameplate You can use items you do not input as automatic default settings LSis 525 5 Applied Functions Input Motor capacity Rated current No load Rated slip Stator resistor RUE voltage current A frequency Hz rati 0 2 14 08 3 33 14 0 40 4 04 24 14 3 33 6 70 26 9 0 75 34 17 3 00 2 600 17 94 15 64 26 2 67 1 170 9 29 22 8 6 33 2 33 0 840 6 63 37 13 8 5 0 2 33 0 500 4 48 200 55 21 0 7A 1 50 0 314 3 19 75 28 2 93 1 33 0 169 2 844 40 0 124 1 00 0 120 1 488 15 53 6 155 1 00 0 084 1 8 18 5 656 19 0 1 00 0 068 0 819 22 768 215 1 00 0 056 0 948 30 104 6 293 1 00 0 042 0 711 0 2 07 0 5 3 33 28 00 121 2 04 14 0 8 3 33 14 0 80 8 0 75 20 1 0 3 00 781 53 9 15 87 15 2 67 3 52 27 9 22 5 0 19 2 33 2 520 19 95 37 8 0 29 2 33 1 500 18 45 55 124 44 1 50 0 940 9 62 75 16 3 54 1 83 0 520 8 53 23 2 72 1 00 0 360 4 48 15 31 0 9 0 1 00 0 250 3 88 18 5 38 0 11 0 1 00 0 168 2 457 400 22 445 12 5 1 00 0 168 2 844 30 60 5 16 9 1 00 0 126 2 183 37 744 20 1 1 00 0 1
43. 7 6 Eq 1 7 8 which is a combination of the main speed command and APP93 Splice Level The following explains why we add the second term to the right side of Eq 1 7 6 As soon as the material is wound onto the new bobbin you may face abrupt load variations and material deflection In order to avoid this phenomenon you must increase the speed to the level of APP93 Splice Level when the new bobbin begins to wind material For example if you set APP93 Splice Level to 20 and the main speed command is 50 the main speed command becomes 60 50 50 x 20 100 when the multi function input specified in 57 Web Splice turns ON LSis 237 2 Winder Unwinder Operation Main speed command APP 93 Splice Level 96 10019 Eg 1 7 6 Main speed 96 Main speed 96 x You can use Eg 1 7 7 to convert this eguation into freguency Hz Main speed command Hz Final main speed command 1 pp_o Max Main Spd H E4 117 100 0 Finally Eq 1 7 7 is processed using Eq 1 7 8 to output the final speed command of the inverter As shown in Eq 1 7 8 initial diameter appears in the denominator of the right hand side because the diameter of bobbin is initialized to a diameter specified in APP63 66 Bobbin Diamtr when the multi function input specified in 57 Web Splice turns ON Final speed command Hz Main speed command Hz Initial diameter 96 x APP 67
44. 720V 04 Carrier Freq 3 0 kHz 0 7 6 0 kHz C 3 0 The default carrier frequency for 90 160 kW products is 3 kHz However as shown in the following figure the value displayed on the bottom left of the keypad is D 5 0 and this value indicates the default for products with a capacity of 75 kW or lower The iS7 Inverter supports two types of load rates The over min for heavy duty and 110 1 min for normal duty Therefore oad rate is 150 1 the current rating varies depending on the load rate and is limited depending on the ambient temperature Rated Current Derating Specifications by Temperature The following is the rated current derating limit at various ambient temperatures when operating inverter at a general load rate VT Variable Torque Rated current VT 10096 80 40 C 50 C Frame 1 2 Rated Current Derating Specifications by Carrier The following is the guaranteed rated current at various carrier frequencies based on the load Inverter capacity 0 75 7 5 kW 11 22 kW Normal temperature 25 C 10 kHz 10 kHz 5 kHz CT load High temperature 40 C 7 kHz 7 kHz 4 kHz High temperature 50 C 5 kHz 5 kHz 4 kHz Normal temperature 25 C 7 kHz 7 kHz 3 kHz VT load High temperature 40 C 2kHz 2 kHz 2 kHz LSis 557 5 Applied Functions 5 22 5 58 Second Motor Operation with One Inverter You can connect an inver
45. AP2 80 Dia Dis Mode without diameter 0 No computation 1 Yes LSis 2 7 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 48 Code Function Name Factory Group number default Range Initial value of the AP2 81 Dia Comp Set diameter 100 0 0 0 300 0 compensation gain Diameter AP2 82 Dia Comp Gain compensation gain Read Only 96 monitor Note 2 DiaComp PID output value for AP2 83 PIDLev the computation 10 00 0 00 100 00 Diameter AP2 84 Dia Comp LPF compensation gain 50 0 sec 0 0 300 0 sec filter Note 1 This code appears when you select W_Spd Close or UW_Spd Close in APPO2 Tnsn Ctrl Mode Note 2 This code appears when you select 1 Yes in AP2 80 Dia Dis Mode AP2 80 Dia Dis Mode Select this code to control the closed loop tension system without computing the diameter This code only appears when you select closed loop speed control mode APP02 W Spd Close UW Spd Close AP2 81 Dia Comp Set Sets the value of the initial diameter compensation gain When using various bobbins setting the bobbin diameter to a moderate size allows you to perform the appropriately control for all of the bobbins AP2 82 Dia Comp Gain This code appears as the AP2 81 value while the System is stopped When the system starts the compensation gain computation value appears under the conditions of the compensation gain computation AP2 83
46. Current thickness of materials m Diameter of capstan x z m As shown in Eq 2 7 1 the motor speed rpm depends on the flux mpm and the current thickness of the web material m Therefore make sure the system computes and estimates the current thickness m of web material during inverter operation Eq 2 7 1 can be converted into Eq 2 7 2 You can use Eq 2 7 2 to estimate the thickness of the web material m Estimated current thickness of materials m Wire speed mpm Motor speed rpm x Diameter of capstan x x m j Base thickness of materials m Eq 2 7 2 36 LSis 3 Capstan Operation 1 Initialization of Web Material Thickness Code x Factory Grou Function Name Range P number default g IN 65 72 Px Define Mult functon Input Web Preset setting 0 No Material thickness APP 71 Thickness En computations selection 1 Yes f Specifies the initial thickness of the web APP 72 Curr Thickness Material and displays 100 0 50 0 500 0 the currently computed thickness of the web material APP72 Curr Thickness Inputs the initial thickness of the web material in stop status You cannot set this code during operation During operation this code displays the computed thickness of the web material For example you can set this code as follows When you install the inverter for Capstan 1 Capstan 2 and Capstan 3 as shown in Fig 2
47. DiaComp PIDLev Sets the reference of PID output for computing the diameter compensation gain The compensation gain value increases when the PID output value exceeds the specified value On the contrary the compensation gain decreases when the PID output value falls below the negative value specified AP2 84 Dia Comp LPF Specifies the time for computing diameter compensation gain If you need quicker control specify a small value for AP2 84 LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 Gain Computation Stop at AccellDecel When you compute the compensation gain during accel decel the PID output value becomes unstably transient so the system cannot properly compute the gain On the contrary unless you compute the compensation gain over a very ong accel decel time the PID output value may become saturated Thus you need to select the appropriate value for each system Code Factory Group number Fun Name default Range Selection diameter 0 No AP2 ge n Xcel Comp En compensation gain 0 No R computation for M 1 Yes accel decel Speed filter for AP2 86 Steady Chk LPF constant speed 1 0 sec 0 0 100 0 sec judgment Speed difference for AP2 87 Steady Chk Lev constant speed 1 00 0 00 50 00 judgment Note 1 This code appears when you select 1 Yes in AP2 80 Dia Dis Mode Note 2 This code appears when you select 0 No in AP2 85 Xcel Comp En AP2 85 Xcel Co
48. Functions ADV 71 ADV 71 ADV 71 When vou set 0 Free Run When vou set 1 Q Stop When you set 1 Q Stoesume Operation command P1 LSis 1 5 Applied Functions 5 6 5 14 Frequency Operation command Dwell Operation Operating the Inverter in Dwell Mode Code Group number Function display I value Range Unit Start frequency ADV 20 Acc Dwell Freq 5 00 Max Hz freguency ADV 21 Acc Dwell Time 0 0 0 10 sec Start frequency ADV 22 Dec Dwell Freg 5 00 Max Hz frequency ADV 23 Dec Dwell Time id 0 0 0 10 sec When an operation command is input you can operate the inverter at a constant speed with the preset acceleration dwell frequency during the acceleration dwell ime and then the inverter begins to accelerate When a stop command is input you can operate the inverter at a constant speed with the preset deceleration dwell frequency during the deceleration dwell time before the inverter stops When you use the control mode DRV 09 Control Mode as the V F mode you can use it to operate the inverter at the dwell frequency before opening the mechanical brake under the elevator load and then open the brake If you perform a dwell operation at a frequency higher than the motor s rated slip under similar loads as shown in the previous examples bear in mind that the overcurrent flowing through the motor may damage it or adversely affect its lifespan
49. Hz The possible value range is lower than the Max Freq value You can change the measurement speed at your own discretion APP81 99 FricComp Trq 1 10 After the system measures the friction loss it saves the friction loss value for the specified speed You can change this value at your own discretion The system computes the friction loss and compensates for it with the speed as shown in the following Fig 1 11 1 LSis 245 2 Winder Unwinder Operation TraLossComp S 7 Friction Loss A CurrSpd Fig 1 11 1 Friction loss by speed 3 Initial Tension Boost Code Factory gt Frequency Hz Group number Function Name default Range APP 33 Init Tns Acct iial tension 1 0 sec 0 1 60 0 sec oost time APP 78 Init Boost Tns _ Initial tension 150 0 100 0 500 0 boost value APP33 Init Tns AccT Outputs the value of the initial boosted torque limit for a set period of time This value is on APP02 W_Spd O APP73 Init Boost Tns This boo computed at initial startup This val mode APP02 W_Spd Open U_Spd Open ly effective in open loop speed control mode pen U_Spd Open sts the tension to the torque limit that is finally ue is only effective in open loop speed control You can use this code to boost the initial tension and get fast tension response characteristics at initial startup 246 LSis 2 Winder Unwinder
50. Level 1 Stall level 1 30 250 180 x 4 1 o o x o x Stall PRT51 PRT55 53 0h1B35 Stall Fred 2 frequency 2 Hz 60 00 o olo x o x 54 0h1B36 Stall Level 2 Stalllevel2 30 2509 180 x ojo x o x Stall PRT53 PRT57 55 0h1B37 Stall Fred 3 frequency 3 Hz 60 00 o olo x o x 56 0h1B38 Stall Level 3 Stalllevel3 30 250 180 x oJo x o x 57 0h1B39 Stall Freq 4 Stall PRTSS DRV20 go 09 o olo x o x frequency 4 Hz 58 Oh1B3A Stall Level 4 Stalllevel 4 30 250 180 x ojo x o x DB DB resistor 66 Oh1B42 Wam ED Warning 0 30 0 o o o o o o level Overspeed 70 0h1B46 OverSPD judgment 20 130 120 0 o x x o x o g frequency Overspeed 72 0h1B48 OverSPD judgment 0 01 10 00sec 0 01 o x x o x o time 0 No 78 Oh1B49 Speedi Dey K iet 0 No o x x o xix Trip fault 1 Yes 74 Oh1B4A Speed Dev Speed error Mae 20 00 o x x o x x Band width frequency Hz i 75 Oh1B4B Speed Speed error 0 1 1000 0 sec 1 0 o x x o x x 6 46 LSis 6 Table of Functions Communica Setting range address g g DevTime judgment time Encoder 0 No Enc Wire option S 77 Oh1B4D Check connection 4 vs 0 No o x x o x o check Encoder 78 Oh1B4E Ene CTER connection 0 1 1000 0sec 1 0 o x x o x o check time Cooling fan 0 Trip 79 Oh1B4F na fault 0 Trip o 00 0 00 selection Warning Motion 0 None 80 0h1B50 OptTrip selection 1 FreeRu Free
51. ONLY PARAMETER SETTINGS A 1 A 1 OVOIVIOW izcie ule hh D rij Flea rada sada tea red ana LR A 1 APPENDIXB SETTING THE PARAMETERS xii B 1 Setting Winder Paramelers 72 Li e a dtd desee e ede redis B 2 B 2 Setting Unwinder Parameters initi teniente risas piri teas B 3 B 3 Setting Capstan Parameters eese nnns B 4 MW rrantyii1 aikdti da bad aa ag data da a B 5 Manual Revision History LSis 1 Precautions 1 Precautions 1 1 Product Overview sv 0008 is7 2 R Applicable motor Input DBR Control capacity voltage 0008 0 75 kw 0015 1 5kW 0022 2 2kW 0037 3 7 kW 0055 5 5kW Blank 0075 7 5kW N Non EMC 0110 11kW Blank 2 DCL Non 0150 15kW NON O Three OPEN m DBR LS 0185 18 5kW phase F Inverter 200 230 V EMC 0220 22w Universal E R Web inverter 4 E DBR Control 0300 30kW Three S Enclosed D sae h GLCD ULTypet 0370 37kW pee i wtf DCL resistor 380 480 V Graphic built in 0450 45 kW loader Note 2 FD 0550 55 kW EMC 0750 75 kW DCL 0900 90kW 1100 110 kW 1320 132kW 1600 160 kW Note 1 A Type 1 Enclosed product satisfies the requirements for adding a separate conduit option to an iS7 product This applies to all products with capacities ranging from 0 75 to 75 kW Note 2 Only products w
52. PG I Gain Specifies the proportional gain PG P Gain and integral gain PG I Gain of the speed controller A higher proportional gain reduces the response time However setting the proportional gain too high may cause the speed controller to function unstably In contrast to this a lower integral gain reduces the response time However an excessively low integral gain setting may cause the speed controller to function unstably CON 47 PG Slip Max This code is the reference value as a percentage of the rated slip BAS12 Rated Slip You can use the value of this code as the maximum compensation slip value For example if this function code is 90 and the rated slip BAS12 Rated Slip is 30 rpm then the maximum compensation slip is equal to 30 0 9 27 rpm LSis 5 5 Applied Functions 5 11 Sensorless I Vector Control Code Group number Function display Setting display DRV 09 Control Mode 3 Sensorless 1 DRV 10 Torque Control 0 No DRV 14 Motor Capacity x XXX kW BAS 11 Pole Number E 4 BAS 12 Rated Slip gt 2 00 Hz BAS 13 Rated Curr 3 6 A BAS 14 Noload curr E 0 7 A BAS 15 Rated Volt 220 V BAS 16 Efficiency 83 96 BAS 20 Auto Tuning 2 Rs Lsigma CON 21 ASR SL P Gain1 s 100 0 CON 22 ASR SL I Gain1 2 200 msec For high performance operation you should measure the parameters of the motor connected to the inverter output Use
53. PID I Time On APP45 PID P2 Gain APP46 PID I2 Time APP51 PID Start Ramp Increases the ramp time during the set time of PID output when the inverter initially starts Fig 3 3 2 b shows the output of the P controller at start up when the P gain is 100 and the PID error is 100 The dotted line in figure b shows the output of the P controller when APP51 PID Start Ramp is O sec The solid line in figure b shows that the output of the PID controller at initial start up tends to increase by the ramp time based on the value of APP51 PID Start Ramp In other words the solid line in b is more advantageous than the dotted line in b due to the transient phenomena that exists when the inverter initially starts PID error A 100 a P controller output US p 100 b gt APP51 PID Start Ramp Operation command c Operation command On Fig 3 3 2 Activating APP51 PID Start Ramp Moreover the APP51 PID Start Ramp value is based on the PID controller output at 100 For example when APP51 PID Start Ramp is set to 5 sec it takes 5 sec to fully saturate the output of the PID controller to 100 at initial start up However it takes 2 5 sec to saturate the output of the PID controller to 50 at initial start up APP52 53 PID Hi Lo Lmt Specifies the upper and lower limit of the PID controller output In addition to this the cumulative value of t
54. PID WakeUp Lev If you select 1 Above Level you can start the inverter when the volume is more than the value specified in APP 39 If you select 2 Beyond Level you can restart the inverter when the difference between the reference and feedback is more than the value specified in APP 39 PID Sleep Freq APP 38 PID WakeUp Lev APP 39 PID Feedback Output frequency Fx PID operation section Sleep section WakeUp section PID Sleep DT APP 37 5 PID Operation Switching PID Openloop When you input a terminal set to No 22 PID Openloop in IN 65 75 Px Define of the multi function terminal block this function stops the PID operation and switches to general operation If the terminal is OFF you can restart the PID operation LSis 5 Applied Functions Auto tuning You can measure the motor parameters automatically Moreover you can connect the encoder option card to the inverter body to test the operating conditions of the encoder You can use motor parameters measured by auto tuning for auto torque boost sensorless vector control vector control etc Ex Based on a 0 75 kW 220 V motor display jal settings display DRV 14 Motor Capacity 1 0 75 kw BAS 11 Pole Number gt 4 BAS 12 Rated Slip E 40 rpm BAS 13 Rated Curr 7 3 6 A BAS 14 Noload curr 1 6 A BAS 15 Rated Volt
55. Quick Stop is On or Web break detected or e Multi function input Web Dis PID is On or APP15 Web PID En is Yes or During Jog Operation LSis 231 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 32 4 Web Function without Diameter Computation Code number Group Factory Function default Selection of web AP2 80 Dia Dis Mode without diameter 0 No No computation Yes Select this option to enable tension control operation without entering a diameter value If you select Yes for AP2 80 the current diameter becomes the minimum diameter regardless of the diameter computation and the value of diameter has no practical effects on tension control For more details on web function without diameter computation please see section 1 12 Web Function without Diameter Computation LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 7 Final Speed Computation Section Spl ice Level Min Fixed PID E Compensation Gain Diameter Wain sped Fig 1 7 1 Final speed computation section LSis 23 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 1 The final speed computation section determines the final speed command Hz of the inverter It uses the main speed computed in the main speed command section In3 main speed the PID output computed in the Web PID
56. S fe Time Roget inverter operation 1 Yes D ho E 78 Real Time Clock display yy mm dd hh mm R Accumulated time of cooling fan 74 Fan Time operation yy mm dd hh mm 5 70 M Fan Time Ret Initializes the accumulated time of yymmidd hhmm T cooling fan operation 652 LSis 6 Table of Functions LSis 6 53 7 iS7 Communication Common Areas 7 iS7 Communication Common Areas 7 1 iS7 Monitoring Common Areas Communic ation Parameter Assigned content by bit Address 0h0300 Inverter model i87 000Bh 0 75 kW 3200h 1 5 kW 4015h 2 2 KW 4022h 3 7 KW 4037h 5 5 KW 4055h 7 5 KW 4075h 11 kW 40B0h 15 KW 40FOh 18 5 kW 4125h 0h0301 Inverter capacity 22 kW 4160h 30 kW 41E0h 37 kW 4250h 45 kW 42D0h 55 kW 4370h 75 kW 44B0h 90 kW 45A0h 110 KW 46E0h 132 kW 4840h 160 kW 4A00h 185 KW 4B90h 200 V single phase self cooling 0220h 200 V 3 phase self cooling 0230h 200 V single phase forced cooling 0221h Inverter voltage power as s input types single i 800 V 3 phase forced cooling 0231h phase 3 phase 400 V single phase self cooling 0420h Cooling method 400 V 3 phase self cooling 0430h 400 V single phase forced cooling 0421h 400 V 3 phase forced cooling 0431h Example 0h0100 Version 1 00 0h0101 Version 1 01 0h0303 Inverter S W version 0h0304 Reserved k k B15 0 Normal sta
57. Unwinder Operation 2 2 General Configuration 1 Closed Loop Speed Control Mode The following table outlines the inputs and outputs for each section Functional section Outp Main speed command Out Main speed section Tension command Outi Tension command section Outt Error change compensation frequency Hz Web PID Int Diameter controller 5 Sec on Out2 PID Out 26 In2_ Tension command 96 Out3 PID feedback Int Current output frequency Hz Diameter computation In2 Main speed Out Diameter section In3 Web brake event 0 1 Final speed ipi Error change compensation 0411 Final speed command Hz computation nT frequency Hz P Hz LSis 23 2 Winder Unwinder Operation onal n Fun se section In2 Input Diameter In3 Main speed In4 PID output Out2 Main speed PID In5 Compensation gain Analog output Int Main speed PID i section In2 Main speed Open circuit detection Int PID feedback 96 Outi Web brake event 0 1 section Web function Int PID output without diameter Outi Compensation gain computation In2 Current output frequency Hz section 2 4 LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 Closed Loop Tension Control Mode Speed Feed back The following table
58. V z 14 V2 Monitor 3 Output 23 Monitor Line 3 Monitor mode display item 3 15 12 Monitor mA Voltage 16 12 Monitor 17 PID Output 18 PID Ref Value 19 PID Fbk Value 20 Torque 21 Torque Limit 22 Tra Bias Ref 23 Speed Limit 24 Load Speed 25 XV1Monitor V 26 XV1Monitor Note 51 Items no 7 and 8 do not appear in the Anytime Parameters 650 LSis 6 Table of Functions Config Mode CNF No Name Setting range Reference page 27 XI1Monitor mA 28 XI Monitor 26 29 XV2Monitor V 30 XV2Monitor 31 XI2Monitor mA 32 XI2Monitor 33 XV3Monitor V 34 XV3Monitor 35 XI3Monitor mA 36 XI3Monitor 26 37 XV4Monitor V 38 XV4Monitor 39 XI4Monitor mA 40 XI4Monitor 41 Main Spd Disp 42 Curr Diameter 43 Curr Thickness 24 Mon Mode Init Monitor mode initialization 2 0 No 1 Yes 30 Option 1 Type Option slot 1 type display 0 None 0 None Option 31 Option 2 Type Option slot 2 type display 1 PLC 0 None Option 2 Profi 32 Option 3 Type Option slot 3 type display 3 Ext VO 0 None Option 4 Encoder 0 No 1 All Grp 2 DRV Grp 3 BAS Grp 4 ADV Grp 5 CON Grp 6 IN Grp 40 Parameter Init Parameter initialization 5 63 7 OUT Grp 8 COM Grp 9 APP Grp 10 AUT Grp 11 APO Grp 12 PRT Grp 13 M2 Grp Changed parameter 0 View All 41 Changed Para 0
59. View All 5 65 Sign View Changed Lsis 6 51 6 Table of Functions Config Mode CNF Reference page 0 None 1 JOG Key 42 Multi Key Sel Multi function key item 0 None 5 66 5 70 2 Local Remote 3 UserGrp SelKey 0 None 43 Macro Select Macro function item 1 Draw App 0 None 5 68 2 Traverse 0 No 44 Erase All Trip Fault history deletion 0 No 5 70 1 Yes 0 No 45 UserGrp AllDel User registration code deletion i m 0 No 5 66 es 0 No 46 Parameter Read Read parameters i x 0 No 5 62 es 0 No 47 Parameter Write Write parameters 0 No 5 62 1 Yes 0 No 48 Parameter Save Saves communication parameters S 0 No 5 62 es 50 View Lock Set Hide parameter mode 0 9999 Un locked 5 64 51 View Lock Pw Password to hide parameter mode 0 9999 Password 5 64 52 Key Lock Set Lock parameter edit 0 9999 Un locked 5 65 53 Key Lock Pw Password to lock parameter editing 0 9999 Password 5 65 0 No 60 Add Title Up Additional keypad title update i Y 0 No 5 70 es 0 No 61 Easy Start On Simple parameter setting S 0 Yes 5 69 es 0 No 62 WHCount Reset Initializing power consumption i 7 0 No 5 70 es 70 On time Accumulated time of inverter motion yy mm dd hh mm 71 Run time Accumulated time of inverter operation yy mm dd hh mm Initializing the accumulative time of O No
60. again once the password is registered CNF 50 View Lock Set If you enter the registered password with the hide parameter mode function disabled Locked appears and no parameter groups are visible in the keypad When you enter the password again Unlocked appears When using the mode key to move to the next step parameter mode appears When the hide parameter group function is active you cannot change the functions related to inverter operation Therefore be sure to remember the registered password LSis 5 Applied Functions Prohibit Parameter Change Code number i i Setting display CNF 52 Key Lock Set 2 Unlocked s CNF 53 Key Lock PW Password 5 You can use the password registered by the user to prohibit parameter changes CNF 53 Key Lock PW Registers the password you want to use to prohibit parameter changes Perform the following steps to register the password Order Des Press the PROG key in CNF 52 code to display the previous password registration window The factory default setting is No 0 For the first registration enter No 0 If there is a previous password enter it If the entered password matches the previous password a display window appears for you to register new password If the password entered differs from the previous password the previous password registration window reappears 2 Register the new password 3 T
61. auto tuning BAS 20 Auto Tuning to measure the parameters before initiating Sensorless Vector operation The inverter and motor should have the same capacity to achieve high performance in Sensorless Vector control mode A motor with a capacity that is two or more levels smaller than the inverter capacity could adversely affect the control characteristics If this is the case change the control mode to V F control mode Moreover DO NOT connect multiple motors to the inverter output when operating the inverter in Sensorless I Vector control mode Before auto tuning input the following items as stated on the motor nameplate DRV 14 Motor Capacity Motor capacity BAS 11 Pole Number No of poles BAS 12 Rated Slip Rated slip BAS 13 Rated Curr Rated current BAS 15 Rated Volt Rated voltage BAS 16 Efficiency Efficiency 5 32 LSis 5 Applied Functions Auto tuning when the motor is stopped If it is difficult to remove the load connected to the motor shaft select 2 Rs Lsigma as the auto tuning item BAS 20 Auto Tuning Measure the motor parameters when the motor stops Use the motor no load current as the basic setting After performing auto tuning the motor stator resistance Rs and leakage inductance Lsigma values are saved in BAS 21 and BAS 22 Auto tuning as the motor rotates Disconnect the load connected to the motor shaft and then select 1 All as the auto tuning item Selecti
62. below Web Torque Limit APP80 The system then initiates the proper protective operation based on this setting Group Code number Func Name Factory default Range Web Break OUT 31 33 Relayt 2 Q1 Multifunction output we Break Hi ss contact Web Break Lo 0 None APP 76 Web Brk En Web break detection 1 Warning Warning function selection 2 Free run Web break detection APP gren Web Brk St Diy delay time at initial 10 0 sec 0 0 800 0 sec startup APP 7g n Web Brk Diy Web break delay time 5 0 sec 0 0 300 0 sec LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation Group Code number Function Name Factory default Range ot 1 m Web break detection R Lane D APP 79 Web Brk Lev Hi upper limit 80 0 APP80 100 0 Note 1 Web break detection a APP 80 Web Brk Lev Lo fewer iit 20 0 0 0 APP79 Note 1 This code appears when you select Warning or Free run in APP76 Web Brk En APP76 Web Brk En Select None to disable web break detection When you select Free run the inverter executes a free run stop when it detects a web break If multi function output contact is set to 29 Trip the multi function output contact turns ON If you select Warning as the factory default and a web break is detected the inverter does not execute a free run stop and continues operating normally The inverter displays a Warning on the digital loader If
63. by selecting No 18 PID Fbk Value in CNF 06 08 APP 22 PID P Gain APP 26 P Gain Scale Defines the output rate for the difference error between the reference and the feedback If the P gain is set to 50 then the system outputs 50 of the errors You can set the P gain within the 0 0 to 1000 0 range If you need a value lower than 0 1 then use the P Gain Scale in APP 26 APP 23 PID I Time Sets the time for outputting the accumulated error volume If the error setting is 100 set the time for when it reaches a 100 output If the integral time PID I Time is 1 second then 100 is outputted 1 second after the error reaches 100 You can use the integral time to reduce normal errors Set the function of the multi function terminal block to No 21 Term Clear and then turn ON the terminal block This allows you to delete the accumulated integral volume 520 LSis 5 Applied Functions APP 24 PID D Time Sets the output volume for the error change rate If the differential time PID D Time is 1 msec and the rate of change per second is 100 then 1 is outputted every 10 msec APP 25 PID F Gain Sets the target volume to the PID output and sets its rate This can improve response time APP 27 PID Out LPF You can use this code when the PID controller output changes too quickly or the entire system becomes unstable due to severe oscillations Usually small values the default value is 0 increase the response time bu
64. cn Tel 86 21 5237 9977 609 Fax 89 21 5237 7191 E LSIS Beijing Office B China Address B tower 17th FL Beijing Global Trade Center B D No 36 BeiSanHuanDong u DongCheng District Beijing 100013 China e mail cuixlaorong lsis com cn Tel 86 10 5825 6025 7 Fax 86 10 5825 6026 N LSIS Guangzhou Office Guangzhou China Address Room 1408 14th FL New Poly Tower 2 Zhongshan Liu Road Guangzhou China e mail linsz Isis com Tel 86 20 8326 6764 Fax 86 20 8326 6287 N LSIS Chengdu Office Chengdu China Address 12th FL Guodong Building No 52 Jindun Road Chengdu 610041 P R China e mail yangc Glsis com cn Tel 86 28 8612 9151 Fax 86 28 8612 9236 N LSIS Qingdao Office Qingdao China Address 7B40 Haixin Guangchang Shenye B D B No 9 Shan dong Road Qingdao 26600 China e mail lirElsis com cn Tel 86 532 8501 6568 Fax 86 532 583 3793 X LSIS constantly endeavors to improve its products The Information in this manual is subject to change without notice LSIS Co Ltd 2011 All Rights Reserved SV iS7 Dedicated Web Controller 2013 12
65. code in combination with multi function input Ext Dis PID as shown in Table 3 3 1 Table 3 3 1 Selecting whether to use the External PID Controller APP85 Ext PID En se Status of mul ether to use the Ext PID input Ext Controller Yes Default Off O Yes Default On x No Off X LSis 4 Other Functions Status of multi function Whether to use the Ext PID input Ext Dis PID Controller APP85 Ext PID En setting APP16 PID Output Indicates the current PID output as a percentage APP17 PID Ref Value Indicates the current PID reference as a percentage APP18 PID Fdb Value Indicates the current PID feedback as a percentage APP19 PID Ref Set Sets the reference for the PID controller using the keypad APP20 PID Ref Src This code allows you to select from a variety of methods to input the PID controller reference information keypad analog internal COM external COM and PLC option APP21 PID F B Src Selects how to input the PID controller feedback analog internal COM external COM and PLC option APP22 PID P Gain Indicates the P1 gain of the PID controller If the P gain is 100 and the error is 100 then the P controller output is 100 APP23 PID I Time Indicates the 1 gain of the PID controller If the gain is 10 sec and the error is 100 then it takes 10 seconds to saturate the controller output to 100 APP24 PID D Tim
66. control the operation frequency increases due to load variation so it is necessary to operate the auxiliary motor The conditions to turn on the output terminal relay or multi function output Qx of the inverter to operate the auxiliary motor are as follows It is possible to operate the auxiliary motor if 1 the speed of the main motor increases above the starting frequency of the auxiliary motor APO 23 26 2 the starting delay time of the auxiliary motor APO 31 has elapsed and 3 the difference between the PID control reference of the main motor and the feedback becomes greater than the pressure difference of the auxiliary motor operation APO 40 APO 27 30 Stop Freq 1 4 Specifies the stopping frequency of the auxiliary motor When the operation frequency of the main motor decreases below a certain frequency while the auxiliary motor is operating you must stop the auxiliary motor The conditions for stopping the auxiliary motor are as follows It is possible to stop an auxiliary motor if 1 the speed of the main motor decreases below the stopping frequency of the auxiliary motor APO 27 30 2 the stopping delay time of the auxiliary motor APO 32 has elapsed and 3 the difference between the PID control reference of the main motor and the feedback becomes less than the pressure difference of the auxiliary motor operation APO 40 APO 41 Aux Acc Time APO 42 Aux Dec Time When the auxiliary motor operates or stops the
67. data If you select No 1 All Groups and press the PROG key the initialization starts No 0 appears when it is complete 2 DRV 13 M2 You can initialize parameters for individual groups If you select a group and press the PROG key the initialization starts When completed No 0 No is displayed LSis 563 5 Applied Functions 5 29 Hide Parameter Mode and Prohibit Parameter 5 64 Changes Hide Parameter Mode Function Mode Function display Se isplay Unit CNF 50 View Lock Set E Unlocked CNF 51 View Lock PW Password 2 You can set a password and make parameter PAR mode invisible on the keypad All other modes CNF mode user mode macro mode trip mode remain visible except for parameter PAR mode CNF 51 View Lock PW Registers the password you want to use for hide parameter mode function Perform the following procedure to register the password Order Press the PROG key in the CNF 51 code to display the previous password registration window The factory default setting is No 0 For the first registration enter No 0 1 If there is a previous password enter it If the entered password matches the previous password a display window appears for you to register new password If the password entered differs from the previous password the previous password registration window reappears 2 Register the new password 3 The CNF 51 View Lock PW appears
68. input Web Preset remains ON you cannot compute the thickness of any web materials LSis 3 7 3 Capstan Operation 3 8 2 Material Thickness Computation Code Factory Group number Function Name default Range Material thickness 0 No APP 71 Thickness En computation 1 Yes selection 1 Yes The initial thickness setting stop status APP 72 Curr Thickness or current thickness 100 0 50 0 300 0 display during operation Material thickness APP 74 Thickness LPF computation filter 30 0 sec 0 0 300 0 sec Frequency for main DRV19 DRV20 APP 92 Max Main Spd speed 100 60 0 Hz Hz You can convert Eq 2 7 2 to percentages and reorganize it into Eq 2 7 3 Estimated thickness of materials 96 Main speed input 9c Current output freguency Hz APP 92 Max Main Freq x 100 x100 The 100 multiplied on the right side of Eq 2 7 3 is the web material This estimated thickness of th Eg 27 3 he reference thickness of e material is internally limited to the upper limit 300 and lower limit 50 Adjust the time constant of the estimated material thickness using the valu to control the computed time constant of the materia We can use Eq 2 7 3 to explain how to estimate the material during inverter operation In Fig 2 7 1 suppose that the APP73 Thickness Se changes from the factory default of 100 to 150 Cap
69. level of the sensor 36 Oh1B24 Thermal T Lev detecting 0 100 50 0 o overheating motors Fault area of 0 Low the sensor 37 0h1B25 Thermal T detecting 0 Low o o o o o o Area 1 High overheating motor Electronic None 40 0h1828 ETH Trip Sel thermal fault 1 Free Run 0 None o o o o o o level selection 2 Dec 41 0h1B29 Motor Cooling Motor cooling 0 Self cool_ 0 Self cool o o o ojo o LSis 6 45 6 Table of Functions fantype 1 Forced cool Electronic 42 Oh1B2A ETH 1min thermal 1 120 200 150 o O oj jojojo minute rating Electronic 43 Oh1B2B ETH Cont thermal 50 200 120 o o o o o o continuous rating 0 Keypad 1 V1 48 0h1830 Stali Src Set Selle 0 Keypad x 44 o o o x x setting method 3 v2 yp 4 12 5 Pulse Protection Function Group PAR 3 PRT Communication Function s Setting range V address display C T 49 a Stall level Read do Oh1B31 Stall Disp ispay Read Only b ti x 44 o o o x x Bit 000 11 1 Accelerating Stall 50 0h1B32 Stall Prevent prevention 2 Atconstant 000 x 44 OO XJO X motion speed 4 At deceleration 51 0h1B33 Stall Freq 1 Stall DRV19 PRTS3 go po o olo x o x frequency 1 Hz 52 Oh1B34 Stall
70. main motor stops PID control and performs the accel decel operation When the auxiliary motor begins operating the main LSis 5 81 5 Applied Functions motor decelerates to the deceleration frequency of the auxiliary motor over the deceleration time specified in APO 42 When the auxiliary motor stops the main motor accelerates to the starting frequency of the auxiliary motor over the acceleration time specified in APO 41 After the general accel decel operation of the main motor PID control resumes Starting frequency of the auxiliary motor APO 31 Starting frequency of the auxiliary motor APO 23 26 ing frequency of the auxiliary motor APO 27 30 Deceleration time of the main motor when increasing the number of pumps APO 42 Output frequency of the main motor Starting auxiliary motor Output terminal Starting sequence of the auxiliary motor by load increase Stopping delay time for the Starting frequency of the auxiliary motor auxiliary motor APO 32 APO 23 26 Stopping frequenc the auxiliary motor APO 27 30 Output Acceleration time ofthe main motor when frequency of decreasing the number of pumps the main motor APO 41 Auxiliary motor stop Output terminal Stopping sequence of the auxiliary motor by load decrease 582 LSis 5 Applied Functions Motor Auto Change Function You can automatically change the operation order of the mai
71. o o o rotation direction Yes 17 Oht511 Vi Quantizing V quantization 0 04 10 0 04 o o o o o n 11 input amount 20 Oh1514 0 20mA 0 00 Oo o Oojojo Monitor mA display m 0 22 0h1516 M Filter 11 input filter 10 o o o o o time constant 10000 msec 23 0h1517 11 Curr xt Mijas 0 20mA 4 00 o o o o o Output at 24 0h1518 lt Perc yt the I1 min 0 100 0 00 ojojojojo current 25 0h1519 11 Curr x2 niu aineal 0 20 mA 20 00 o o o o o Output at 26 Oh151A It Perc y2 the 11 max 0 100 100 00 Oo o Oojojo current 0 No 31 Oh151F 1 Inverting 11 rotation 0 No o o o o o direction change 1 Yes 32 0h1520 11 Quantizing rd pd 0 04 10 0 04 o o o oj o LSIs 619 6 Table of Functions IE Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that only appear when setting corresponding codes Note 26 IN 12 15 only appear when IN 06 V1 Polarity is set to Bipolar Input Terminal Block Function Group PAR 3 IN Control mode ae i A tad Change Communication Function Setting Initial during Reference EI address displa range value i age play g operation 89 Lic F Lal Note E 0h1523 Weeds po Wes 0 10V 0 00 o S o o o o o V amount display Vi input o Unipolar 4 36 0h1524 V2 Polarity polarity o o o o o o selection 1 Bipolar Bipolar 37 0h1525 V2Fiter V2inputfiter
72. or more Note 48 PRT 13 15 only appear when PRT 12 Lost Cmd Mode is a value other than NONE Protection Function Group PAR gt PRT Control mode TS P Change Communication Function Setting during Reference range age 9 operation pag F TIT 22 0h1B16 OL Trip Time Oprina Taut 0 60 sec 60 0 o o o o o o Underload 0 No 25 oh1B19 ULWam Sel warning 0 No o o o o o o selection 1 Yes Underload 26 Oh1B1A UL Warn Time warning time 0 600 0 sec 10 0 o ojojojojo 0 None 27 Oh1B1B UL Trip Sel Mee A tuit 1 Free Run 0 None o o o o o o 2 Dec 28 Oh1B1C UL Trip Time dis cci eat 0 600 sec 30 0 o 2 o o o o o Underload 3 29 Oh1B1D ULLF Level lower limit level 10 30 30 o ojojojojo 30 0h1B1E ULBF Level Underload 10 100 30 o o o o o o upper limit level Motion under 0 None E oh1B1F No Motor Trip no motor 0 None o lt o o o o o detection Free Run No motor 32 0h1B20 No Motor Level detection 1 100 5 o o o o o o current level 33 Oh1B21 No Motor Time Nomotor 0 4 10 0 sec 3 0 o 3 o o o o o detection delay Selection of o None motion after Thermal T Sel motor 1 Free Run 34 0h1B22 0 None o ojojojojo detects overheating 2 Dec motor 0 None Input selection a Thermal in of the sensor 35 0h1B23 detecting 2 n 0 None X ojojojojo Src overheating 3 V2 motor 4 12 Fault
73. outlines the inputs and outputs for each section Functional secti Inpi tput Main speed command a section Out Main speed Tension command V S section Outt Tension command Web PID controller Int Diameter Outi PID Out section In2 Tension command Out2 PID feedback Int Current freguency Hz Diameter computation A section In2 Main speed Outl Diameter In3 Web brake event 0 1 Int Diameter Final tension o z computation section n2 PID output In3 Tension command Open circuit detection i section Ini PID feedback Outl Web brake event 0 1 LSis 25 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 3 Open Loop Speed Control Mode The following table outlines the inputs and outputs for each section Functional se Main speed command x section s Out Main speed Tension command section Outt Tension command Int Diameter Torque limit computation In2 Tension command M section Outi Torque limit In3 Current output frequency Hz l Current output frequency Int Hz Diameter computation o section In2 Main speed gu Diameter 36 In3 Web brake event 0 1 R g Int Diameter Final spend computation Outi Final speed command Hz In2 Main speed Analog output section Int Main speed Open circuit detection cn Section Int Torque limit Outt Web brake event 0 1
74. select how to issue the main speed command Select Keypad to activate the inverter using the main speed 96 input in APP04 Main Spd Set When you select V1 or I1 you can issue the main speed command using the analog input of the basic I O board Here you can adjust the filter gain and offset of the analog input in INO7 11 V1 Filter Gain Offset and IN22 26 I1 Filter Gain Offset When you select V2 or I2 you can issue the main speed command using the analog input of the extended I O option board Here you can adjust the filter gain and offset of the analog input in IN37 41 V2 Filter Gain Offset and IN52 56 I2 Filter Gain Offset If an encoder option board is installed you can also issue the main speed command using the pulse input of the Encoder Int 485 can issue the main speed command via the RS485 communication Modbus RTU LS Inv 485 built in to the basic I O board Fieldbus and PLC can issue the same command via the COM option card and PLC option card respectively Here Int 485 RS485 communication built in to the basic I O board Fieldbus COM option card and PLC PLC option card are valid up to one decimal place for the main speed command For example to issue a main speed command of 60 096 you must enter 600 for the common area address and 0h0396 for the built in 485 communication COM option card or PLC option card APP06 Main XcelT En This code sets the accel a
75. set to Warning or Free run Application Function Group PAR gt APP Communicai Function Y V address display value operation Lic T 81 0h1851 dope epi a Vaio Read Only 213 o o o x x 82 0h1852 Q Stop Dec Emergency SIOP 0 1 300 0 sec 3 0 o 210 o o o x x 83 Oh1853 Bypass Bypass gain 0 0 300 0 100 0 o 2 40 o o o x x o N 84 Oh1854 Rey Reverse crawling 0 No o 23 o lo o x x Tension En function selection 1 Yes External PID 0 No 85 Oh1855 Ext PID En sel ns xf Des o 49 o o o x x Tae ic 0h1856 VAM e olst Bance l gioa 100 0 0 0 o 224 o o o x x Disturbance Lp 0h1857 V Noise P compensation for P 0 0 100 0 0 0 o 224 o o o x x gain Tm ien 0h1858 red ecd 0 0 1000sec 0 0 o 224 o o o x x LSis 639 6 Table of Functions Communica address disturbances 89 Oh1859 Compen Diameterithickness _ 100 70 o 235342 o o o x x Xcel _ compensation ratio 90 Oh185A con Min main speed 0 0 100 0 3 0 o 231340 O O O X X 91 0h185B Web Spd Speed bypass 9 _ 69 00 Hz 1 00 o 2 39 xix o xx Bias setting Frequency for main Max Main DRV19 92 0h185C Sod speed command DRV20 kz 6000 o 22958 O O O X X ggvs io 0h185D Splice Level Splice level 0 0 100 0 0 0 o 237 O O O X x 94 0h185E TreBoost Tension boost 0 50 00 0 00 o
76. speed search operation LSis 55 5 Applied Functions Ex A speed search operation after the power returns from a momentary power interruption Input power Frequency tt t2 ot Voltage Current Multi function output or relay If a momentary power interruption occurs and the input power is cut off then the inverter generates a low voltage trip Lvt to block the output When the input power returns the inverter inner PI control outputs the frequency before the low voltage trip to increase the voltage t1 If the current increases above the amount specified in ADV 61 then the voltage stops increasing and the frequency decreases 2 If the current falls below the amount specified in ADV 61 then the voltage increases again and the frequency stops the deceleration If the normal frequency and voltage are recovered acceleration is carried out with the frequency before trip ADV 61 SS Sup Current Controls the current during the speed search operation based on the rated current of the motor You can set the gain of the controller in ADV 62 and 63 ADV 64 SS Block Time Starts operation after the output is cut off for a preset amount of time and before starting the speed search operation The speed search operation is meant mainly for large inertia loads We recommend restarting after stopping for a load with high frictional force The iS7 series inverter is designed
77. the analog input exceeds the value defined in ADV 67 the output terminal turns on If it is below the value in ADV 68 it turns off LSis 5 79 5 Applie d Functions 5 39 5 80 MMC Function Use the MMC function to control multiple motors with one inverter in a fan or pump system You can control the speed using the PID control for the motor connected to the inverter output i e the main motor Use the On Off control for the rest of the motors auxiliary motors connected to commercial power by the relay within the inverter The relay for the auxiliary motor control uses Relays 1 and 2 located on the standard I O card inside the inverter and the multi function output terminal Q1 You can use up to 3 relay outputs by connecting an expansion I O option card to he inverter option slot raud Function display Setting display Setting range APP 01 App Mode 3 MMC APO 20 Aux Motor Run 0 0 4 APO 21 Starting Aux E 1 1 4 APO 22 Auto Op Time 0 00 XX XX Min APO 23 Start Freq 1 D 49 99 0 60 Hz APO 24 Start Freq 2 49 99 0 60 Hz APO 25 Start Freq 3 E 49 99 0 60 Hz APO 26 Start Freq 4 i 49 99 0 60 Hz APO 27 Stop Freq 1 E 15 00 0 60 Hz APO 28 Stop Freq 1 5 15 00 0 60 Hz APO 29 Stop Freq 1 E 15 00 0 60 Hz APO 30 Stop Freq 1 amp 15 00 0 60 Hz APO 31 Aux Start DT 60 0 0 3600 0 Sec APO 32 Aux Stop DT 60 0 0 3600 0 Sec APO 33 Num of Aux 4 0 4 APO 3
78. the frequency specified in the ADV 76 CompFreq Limit 548 LS1s 6 Table of Functions 6 6 1 Table of Functions Parameter Mode Drive Group gt DRV Please refer to iS7 user manual for the parameter which a page is not indicated in the table Nee Control mode Communication Function Setting Initial v address display range Lic F T T 00 Jump Code Jump code 0 99 9 ololololo 01 Oht101 Cod Target D ME 0 0 7 o x x Frequency frequency frequency Hz 02 0h1102 Cmd Torque _Torave 180 180 0 0 5 45 x x x o o command 75 QW 20 0 less 03 oh1103 Acc Time Acceleration 9 600 sec o o o o o time 90 KW 60 0 or more 75 KW 30 0 or less 04 0h1104 Dec Time eee 0 600 sec o o o o o ime 90 KW 90 0 or more o Keypad 1 FwRx 1 Es d Operation 2 FxRx 2 06 0h1106 e Command 1 PXIA o o o o o ource Methods 3 int 485 4 Field Bus Option 5 PLC Option Frequency 07 0h1107 Freq Ret Setting 0 Keypad 1 0 Keypad 5 1 o o o x x Src 1 Methods 1 Keypad 2 2 vi 3 n Torque 4 uz ivo 08 0h1108 Trq Ref Src Command 5 12 M 545 XIX x o o Methods 6 i485 7 Encoder 8 FiedBus 9 PLC 0 VIF 5 76 09 Control Control 1 VWF PG 5 31 S 0h1109 0 VIF o o o o o idu Mode mode 2 Slip Compen 5 16 3 Sensorless 1 5 32 L
79. the heat sink fan has run Oh0345 Fan Time minute 0 Min Total number of minutes excluding the total number of Fan Time days 0h0346 Reserved l 0h0347 Reserved l 0h0348 Reserved l 0h0349 Reserved l 0h034A Option 1 0 NO 1 Reserved Oh034B Option 2 s 2 Reserved 3 Profibus 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Reserved 7 RNet 0h034C Option 3 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 PLC 20 External IO 1 23 Encoder LSis 7 7 7 iS7 Communication Common Areas 7 2 Common Areas for iS7 Control Communic ation Parameter Assigned content by bit Address 0h0380 Frequency command 0 01 Hz__ Command frequency setting 0h0381 RPM command 1 rpm Command RPM setting B7__ Reserved B6 Reserved B5 Reserved B4 Reserved B3 091 Free run stop 0h0382 Operation command B2 091 Reset trip B1 0 Reverse command 1 Forward command BO 0 Stop command 1 Run command Ex Forward operation command 0003h Reverse operation command 0001h 0h0383 Acceleration time 01 sec Acceleration time setting 0h0384 Deceleration time 01 sec Deceleration time setting BIS Virtual DI 16 COM85 BI4 Virtual DI 15 COM84 BIS Virtual DI 14 COM83 BI2 Virtual DI 13 COM82 Bit Virtual DI 12 COMB1 BIO Virtual DI 11 COMBO B9 Virtual DI 10 COM79 Virtual digital B8 Virtual DI 9 COM78 0h0385 input control 2 EN TDI 0 Off 1 On B
80. value specified in this code output falls below LSis 2 4 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 11 Torque Limit Computation Section Trq2 Trgl 9 TrgLossComp 2147 4 CurrSpd Spal Trgl Current outpi frequency Hz Friction loss Friction loss Init Tns AccT Tension Wat command X Dia 4 eae TorgueLimit TensionRefe T7 Frctionloss T Torque Limit XI 3o s Diameter Min Diameter Auto Tuning 7 Friction Loss CompMin Spd CompMin Trq CompMax Spd CompMax Trq Spd2 Spdl Init Boost Tns 1 2 Torque Limit Computation This feature is only available in speed control open loop tension systems You can use the tension command diameter and friction loss value to compute the torque limit as shown in Eq 1 11 1 Current diameter 96 Friction loss E4 1 11 1 Min diameter APP67 Torque Limit Tension command x Friction Loss Measurement Friction occurs in every mechanical system and is a factor that can disturb the control performance of the system and result in loss of mechanical energy When materials are held under tension such as in a tension control system the friction loss that occurs on a roll may influence the tension of the material The Web PID compensates for friction loss in closed loop tension systems but open loop tension systems
81. x 2 Temp Run Control Updow 0 Ne 65 0h1341 WID Sands lt operatorn 0 No o 59 o o o x x Mode frequency save Yes o None 1 vi 66 0h1342 i t 2 n 0 None x 57 o o o o o s vz 4 12 67 0h1343 On C Level Output contact 40 400 90 00 x 57 o o o o o On level s Output contact 710990 68 0h1344 Off C Level pod Output contact 10 00 x 5 79 o o o o o On level o Aways Enable 0 70 0h1346 Run En Safe operation Always x 512 o o o o o Mode selection DI 1 Enable Dependent 0 Free Run pj Safe operation 1 Q Stop 0 Free 15 0h1947 Run Dis Stop top method ms t x 512 o o o o o Resume Safe operation 72 0h1948 O Stop Time deceleration 0 600 0sec 5 0 o 512 o o o o o time Selection of 0 No regeneration 74 0h134A Pe evasion No x 587 o o o o o function for the 1 Yes press Voltage level of ae ae 350V OWAB RegenAvd regeneration x sar lolol ls l t Level evasion motion 400 V 600 for press 800 700V Compensation frequency limit cil Oh134C CompFreq of regeneration 0 10 00Hz 10 x 5 87 o o 0o x x Limit Hz evasion for the press 77 Oh134D ee Regeneration o 190 0 50 0 o 587 0 0 0 X X gain evasion for LSis 1 6 Table of Functions Control mode press P gain Regeneration 78 Oh134E Rage aslan toy 05599900 eee o 587 o o o Xx x Igain msec msec press gain
82. 0 10000 49 o o o o o o time constant em 38 0h1526 v2 volt x1 Minimum input 4 gy 000 o x x o o o voltage of V2 Output at 39 0h1527 v2Percy1 theV2 min 0 100 0 00 o o o o o o voltage Maximum 40 0h1528 V2 Voltx2 inputvoltage 0 10V 0 00 o 5 x x o o o of V2 Output at 41 0h1529 V2Percy2 theV2 max 0 100 100 00 o o o o o o voltage V2 Output at 42 0h152A V2 Voltxt the min 10 0V 0 00 o o o o o o voltage V2 Output 43 0h152B V2 Perc yt atthe min 100 0 0 00 o 5 o o o o o voltage 44 Oh152C Vesa o Mean og 10 00 o o o o o o input voltage s V2 Output 96 at the 45 Oh152F V2 Perc y2 e 100 0 100 00 o 5 o o o o o voltage V2 rotation 0 No 46 0h1530 V2 Inverting direction 0 No o o o o o o change 1 Yes v2 47 0h1532 V2 Ouantizing quantization 0 04 10 0 04 o 5 o o o o o level 12 Monitor 12 input 50 0h1534 mA amount display 0 20 mA 0 00 o 5 o o o o o i 0 10000 52 0h1535 12 Fitter 2 input filter 10 o o o o o o time constant Msec 12 minimum 53 0h1536 I2Currx1 inputcurrent 0 20MA 400 o o o o o o Output at 54 0h1537 l2Percy1 thel2min 0 100 0 00 o o o o o o current 12 maximum 55 0h1538 2Currx2 inputeurrent 0 20MA 1000 o o o o o o Output at 56 Oh153D I2Percy2 thel2max 0 100 100 00 o o o o o o current 61 Oh153E I2Inveting Changing
83. 0 No 0 No o o o o o o 620 LSis 6 Table of Functions Communication Function Setting Initial Change Reference Control mode rotation direction Yes 62 0h153E 12 Quantizing AVantization 4 44 10 0 17 o 3 o o o o o level Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that only appear when setting corresponding codes Note 27 IN 35 62 only appear when an expansion IO board is installed Input Terminal Block Function Group PAR gt IN Control mode Communication Function Setting Reference address displa range Pay g operation P1 terminal 0 NONE 65 0h1541 P1 Define function 1 FX x o o o o o setting 1 FX P2 terminal 66 0h1542 P2 Define function 2 RX 2 RX x X x o o o setting P3 terminal 67 0h1543 P3 Define function 3 RST 5 BX x o o o o o setting P4 terminal 68 Oh1544 P4 Define function 4 Peel 4 Ext x o o o o o setting Pp P5 terminal 69 0h1545 P5 Define function 5 BX 7 Sp L x o o o o o setting P6 terminal 70 Oh1546 P6 Define function 6 JOG 8 Sp M x 5 5 o o o o o setting P7 terminal 71 0h1547 P7 Define function 7 Speed L 9 Sp H x o o o o o setting P8 terminal 72 0h1548 P8 Define function 8
84. 0 or less leads to he lower rate of output frequency variations due to the estimated material hickness at the actual output frequency of the inverter and also leads to the lower speed of said variations reflected in the actual output frequency 312 LSis 3 Capstan Operation n order to ensure that the inverter operates reliably at a constant speed we recommend setting APP89 Compen Xcel to a value of less than ca 50 The final speed Hz is the final value of Eq 2 8 2 which is regularly computed in the final speed computation section so acceleration and deceleration occur frequently Here the accel and decel time is specified in DRVO3 Acc Time and DRV04 Dec Time respectively Moreover selecting 5 Tension Ctrl in APPO1 App Mode automatically sets both DRV03 Acc Time and DRV04 Dec Time to 0 5 sec You can set different values for DRVO3 Acc Time and DRV04 Dec Time but they must be less than 2 0 sec in order to rapidly reflect the final speed 3 Reverse Tension This is the same as paragraph 3 of section 1 6 See paragraph 3 of section 1 6 4 Splicing Capstan operation mode does not support splicing LSis 515 3 Capstan Operation 3 14 LSis 4 Other Functions 4 Other Functions 1 Stall Level Control Using the Analog Input You can control the stall level with the analog input V1 l1 V2 I2 Pulse while operating the inverter When the w
85. 0 75 kW 3 BAS 17 Inertia Rate o Based on 0 75 kW DRV 09 Control Mode Control mode Ensure that the control mode is set to 2 Slip Compen DRV 14 Motor Capacity Motor capacity Set the capacity of motor connected o the inverter output BAS 11 Pole Number No of motor poles Input the number of poles stated on the motor nameplate LSis 5 Applied Functions BAS 12 Rated Slip Rated slip Use the RPM rating on the motor nameplate to input the rated slip BAS 13 Rated Curr Rated current Input the rated current shown on the motor nameplate BAS 14 Noload Curr No load current Input the current reading obtained when operating the motor at the rated frequency after removing load devices connected to the motor shaft If it is difficult to measure the no load current input a current level equivalent to 30 50 of the rated motor current BAS 16 Efficiency Motor efficiency Input the efficiency rating stated on the motor nameplate BAS 17 Inertia Rate Load inertia ratio Select the load inertia based on motor inertia 0 Less than 10 times the motor inertia 1 10 times the motor inertia 2 8 More than 10 times the motor inertia _ _ pmx P s s 5 Here jo Rated slip frequency f Rated frequency rpm Motor rated RPM P Number of motor poles Ex Rated frequency 60 Hz Rated RPM 1740 rpm No of poles 4 f e Po ane 120 LSis 5 17 5 Applied Functions 5 8 5 18
86. 00 P controller output 100 APP51 PID Start Ramp Operation command Operation command On Fig 1 5 1 Activating APP51 PID Start Ramp Moreover APP51 PID Start Ramp is based on the PID controller output at 100 For example when APP51 PID Start Ramp is set to 5 sec it takes 5 sec to fully saturate the output of the PID controller to 100 at initial start up However it takes 2 5 sec to saturate the output of the PID controller to 50 at initial start up APP52 53 PID Hi Lo Lmt Specifies the upper and lower limit of the PID controller output In addition to this the cumulative value of the controller is limited to the upper and lower value specified in this code APP98 PID Sample T Changes the execution frequency of the Web PID controller LSis 219 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 20 2 Inertia Compensation Code Factory Group number Func Name default Range 0 None APP 56 Profile P Mode P Gain profile o None 1 Linear selection 2 Square APP 57 Profile P Gain Profile gain 1 0096 0 01 10 0096 Note 1 This code appears when you select Linear or Square in APP56 Profile P Mode The winder develops a larger diameter and produces more inertia over time so it requires more positive inertia compensation In contrast to this the unwinder develops a smaller diameter and produces less inertia over time s
87. 01 1 704 45 90 3 244 1 00 0 084 1422 55 106 6 28 8 1 00 0 069 1 167 75 141 6 35 4 1 00 0 050 0 852 90 167 6 419 1 00 0 039 0 715 110 203 5 48 8 1 00 0 032 0 585 132 242 3 58 1 1 00 0 027 0 488 160 290 5 69 7 1 00 0 022 0 403 185 335 0 77 0 1 00 0 021 0 380 526 LSis 5 Applied Functions 1 Motor Parameter Tuning Rs Lsigma Ls Tr Noload curr BAS 20 Auto Tuning Selects the type of auto tuning and performs Select one of the following items and press the Prog key to immediately perform auto tuning 0 None Displays the initial auto tuning items Indicates when auto tuning is in progress and when it is complete 1 ALL Select this item to measure the motor parameters as the motor rotates You can measure parameters such as the stator resistance Rs leakage inductance Lsigma stator inductance Ls no load current Noload Curr rotor time constant Tr etc If the inverter is equipped with an encoder option card you can also measure the status of the encoder Make sure that you set the correct functions related to the encoder to measure the status of the encoder If you select vector control as the control mode then select 1 ALL auto tuning item Since the parameters are measured as the motor rotates connecting a load to the motor shaft may cause the parameters to be incorrectly measured Therefore remove any loads on the motor to correctly measure the parameters Howeve
88. 1 0 B3 Q2 Expansion 1 0 B2 Q1 Basic I O B1 Relay Basic 1 0 BO Relay Basic 1 0 LSis 73 7 iS7 Communication Common Areas Communic Address ation Parameter Scale Unit Assigned content by bit B15 Virtual DI 16 COM85 B14 Virtual DI 15 COM84 B12 Virtual DI 13 COM82 B13 Virtual DI 14 COM83 B11 Virtual DI 12 COM81 BIO Virtual DI 11 COM80 B9 Virtual DI 10 COM79 dod Virtual digital 1 B8 _ Virtual DI 9 COM78 Input information 87 _ Virtual DI 8 COM77 B6 _ Virtual DI 7 COM76 B5 _ Virtual DI 6 COM75 B4_ Virtual DI 5 COM74 B3 _ Virtual DI 4 COM73 B2 Virtual DI 3 COM72 B1_ Virtual DI 2 COM71 BO Virtual DI 1 COMO 0h0323 Display the selected 5 0 The 1st motor 1 The 2nd motor motor 010324 Alt 0 01 Analog input 1 Basic 1 0 0h0325 AI 0 01 Analog input 2 Basic I O 0h0326 AIS 0 01 Analog input 3 Expansion 1 0 0h0327 Al4 0 01 Analog input 4 Expansion 1 0 0h0328 AO 0 01 Analog output 1 basic 1 0 0h0329 AO2 0 01 Analog output 2 basic 1 0 Oh032A AO3 0 01 Analog output 3 extended I O 0h032B AO4 0 01 Analog output 4 extended I O Oh032C Reserved 5 Oh032D Reserved z Oh032E Reserved E ss Oh032F Reserved z NS 74 LSis 7 iS7 Communication
89. 1 S Est P Gain2 CON 32 S Est Gain2 etc that are applied when the motor rotates at moderate or high speeds ca 1 2 of base frequency under Sensorless Il Vector control These parameters do not appear if you select 0 1 Speed Controller Gain CON 21 ASR SL P Gain1 CON 22 ASR SL I Gain1 These codes change the Speed PI controller gain in Sensorless II Vector control For the PI speed controller the speed controller P gain is the proportional gain for speed errors As the speed error becomes larger the torque output command become larger Therefore the larger the value is the faster the speed deviation decreases The speed controller gain is the integral gain for speed errors It is the time in msec until the gain becomes the rated torque output command when the constant speed error continues The smaller the value is the faster the speed deviation decreases The speed controller gain can improve the speed control waveform while monitoring the changes in the speed If the speed deviation does not decrease quickly increase the speed controller P gain or decrease the gain time in msec However setting the P gain too high or the gain too low can cause severe vibrations If oscillations occurs in the speed waveform try to increase the gain time in msec or P gain CON 23 ASR SL P Gain2 CON 24 ASR SL I Gain2 These only appear when you select No 1 Yes for SL2 G View Sel CON 20 They change the gain of the speed control
90. 100 100 0 0 o o o o o o bias Analog 17 0h1611 AO3 Filter output3 0 10000 msec 5 o o o o o o filter Analog 18 5 CAO constant 0 100 0 0 o o o o o o ii output 3 Analog 19 0h1613 AO3 Monitor output3 1000 1000 0 0 o o o o o o monitor 0 Frequency 1 Current 2 Voltage 3 DC Link Volt 4 Torque 5 Watt 6 Idss 7 lass 2 Analog 0 20 Oh1614 AO4 Mode output4 8 Target Freq o o o o o item 9 Ramp Freq Frequency 10 Speed Fbd 11 Speed Dev PID Ref 12 value PID Fbk 13 Value 14 PID Output 44 15 Constant Analog 21 0h1615 AO4 Gain output2 1000 1000 100 0 o o o o o gain Analog 22 0h1616 AO4Bias output2 100 100 0 0 o o o o o o bias 6 26 LSis 6 Table of Functions Communication Reference address page Analog 23 0h1617 AO4 Filter output2 0 10000 msec 5 o o o o o o filter Analog 24 gt AOI constant 0 100 0 0 o 2 o o o o o Const output 4 Analog 25 0h1619 AO4 Monitor output2 0 1000 0 0 o o o o o o monitor Bit 000 11 1 Low voltage M Any faults 30 Oht61E p Fault 2 other than 010 o o o o o o Out Mode output item low voltage Automatic 3 restart final failure Input Terminal Block Function Group PAR gt OUT Communication Function address display Setting rang
91. 100 25 x o x x x x 43 0h122B User Freq 2 Miser M ME 30 00 x O x x x x frequency 2 frequency Hz 44 Oh122C User Volt 2 User voltage 2 0 100 50 x o x x x x User 0 Max 45 0h122D User Freg3 frequency 3 frequency Hz 45 00 x O X x x x 46 Oh122E User Volt 3 User voltage 3 0 100 75 x o x x x x 47 Ohi22F User Freq 4 User D Max 60 00 x 1 o x x x x frequency 4 frequency Hz 48 0h1230 User Volt 4 User voltage 4 0 100 100 x o x x x x Multi step Noto 6 0 Max 50 0h1232 Step Freq 1 speed frequency Hz 10 00 o o o o x x ireguency 1 Multi step n 51 0h1233 Step Freq 2 speed MEE 20 00 o z o o o x x 1 freguency Hz requency 2 Multi step ee 52 0h1234 Step Freg 3 speed frequency Hz 9000 o o o o x x freguency 3 quency Multi step CHER 58 0h1235 Step Freg 4 4 speed frequency Hz 49 00 o o o o x x requency 4 Multi step oM 54 0h1236 Step Freq 5 speed hu ancy Hz 50 00 o O lOo lOo Xx frequency 5 quency Multi step DM 55 0h1237 Step Freg 6 i speed frequency Hz 90 00 o o ojo x x requency 6 Multi step n 56 0h1238 Step Freq 7 speed Sigo 60 00 o 0 0JO X X P frequency Hz frequency 7 Multi step di 57 0h1239 Step Freq 8 speed frequency Hz 55 00 o o ojo x x frequency 8 quency Multi step AM 58 0h123A Step Freg 9 speed frequency Hz 90 00 o o o o x x frequency 9 Multi step 59 0h123B Step iens speed EED 45 00 o 5 o o olx x frequency 10 quency Multi step mom
92. 13 0000 FFFF Hex 0000 x o o o o o 64 Oh1740 ParaControl 14 Input address 14 0000 FFFF Hex 0000 x ololololo 65 Ohi741 ParaContro 15 Input address 15 0000 FFFFHex 0000 x o o o o o 66 0h1742 Para Control 16 Input address 16 0000 FFFFHex 0000 x o o o o o Communication 70 0h1746 Virtual DI 1 multi function 0 None 0 None o o o o o o input 1 Communication 71 0h1747 Virtual DI 2 multi function 1 FX 0 None o o o o o o input 2 Communication 72 0h1748 Virtual DI 3 multi function 2 RX 0 None o o o o o o input 3 Communication 73 0h1749 Virtual DI 4 multi function 3 RST 0 None o o o o o o input 4 Communication 74 Oh174A Virtual DI 5 multi function 4 External Trip 0 None o o o o o o input 5 Communication 75 0h174B Virtual DI 6 multi function 5 BX 0 None o o o o o o input 6 Communication 76 0h174C Virtual DI 7 multi function 6 JOG 0 None o o o o o o input 7 Communication 77 0h174D Virtual DI 8 multi function 7 Speed L 0 None o o o o o o input 8 Communication 78 Oh174E Virtual DI 9 multi function 8 Speed M 0 None o o o o o o input 9 Communication 79 Oh174F Virtual DI 10 multi function 9 Speed H 0 None o o o o o o input 10 Communication 80 0h1750 Virtual DI 11 multi function 10 Speed X 0 None o o o o o o input 11 6 32 LSis 6 Table of Functions Control mode Communic ation Setting range Function address display Communica
93. 141E S Est Gaint estimator integral 0 30000 on the o 5 34 X X X X X gain 1 motor capacity E Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that only appear when setting corresponding codes Note 17 CON 23 28 and 31 32 only appear when DRV 09 Control Mode is set to Sensorless 2 and CON 20 SL2 G View Sel is set to YES 6 14 LSis 6 Table of Functions Control Function Group PAR gt CON Communication Function Setting Reference address display range ee page Sensorless 2 Varies 31 Oht4tF S Est P Gain2 SPeedestimator 4 1000 according to o 534 x x x x x proportional gain the motor 2 capacity Sensorless 2 oe 32 0h1420 S Est Gain2 speed estimator 1 1000 PRSE o 5 34 X X X X X integral gain 2 pali Sensorless 2 SL2OVM overmodulation 34 0h1422 Perc range 100 180 120 00 O X O0 X X X adjustment Note Sa 0h142D PG P Gain RSN 0 9999 3000 o 5 31 o x x x x PG operation 46 0h142E PG Gain integral gain 0 9999 50 o 5 31 O X X X X 47 Oht42F esls pner 0 200 100 bo 531 OIX X X x Max PG operation Current 48 ACR P Gain controller 0 10000 1200 O 5 34 X OjojOo O P gain Current 49 ACR Gain controller 0 10000 120 O 5 34 xjojojojo 1 gain Speed controller 51 0h1433 ASR Ref LPF reference filter 0 20000 msec 0 x X O
94. 16 M2 Inertia Rt Load inertia rate 17 M2 Rs Stator resistor 18 M2 Lsigma Leakage inductance LSis 5 Applied Functions Code Number Fun Details 19 M2 Ls Stator inductance 20 M2 Tr Rotor time constant 25 M2 V F Patt Output voltage pattern 26 M2 Fwd Boost Positive direction torque boost 27 M2 Rev Boost Negative direction torque boost 28 M2 Stall Lev Stall level 29 M2 ETH 1min One minute continuous rated level of the electronic thermal 30 M2 ETH Cont Electronic thermal operation level 40 M2 LoadSpdGain Adjust load speed display gain 41 M2 LoadSpdScal Adjust load speed display scale 42 M2 LoadSpdUnit Adjust load speed display unit Use Apply the following settings to use the second motor operation function of the P3 terminal in an existing 7 5 kW motor for a 3 7 kW switching operation Group Code number Function display Setting display Unit IN 67 P3 Define 26 2 Motor M2 06 M2 Capacity 3 7 kW KW M2 08 Ctrl Mode 0 VIF iS Inverter P3 O M3 Motorz 37kw 2 amp Motor1 7 5k LSis 559 5 Applied Functions 5 23 Bypass Operation Function display Setting display IN 65 75 Px Define 16 Exchange OUT 31 32 Relay1 2 17 Inverter Line OUT 33 Q1 Define 18 Comm Line You can switch the load operated by the inverter to the commercial power or vi
95. 2 ADV 72 Q Stop Time si 5 0 0 600 sec IN 65 75 Px Define 13 Run Enable 0 48 A function that uses the multi function input terminal to make the operation command effective by software Code Function E Group number display Code description Selects a multi function input terminal for No 13 safe operation mode RUN Enable IN 65 75 Px Define The safe operation function does not work if you only set the multi function terminal block to RUN Enable When you set this code to 1 DI Dependent the multi function input terminals can recognize this ADV 70 Run En Mode operation command Safe operation mode cannot function if you set this code to 0 Always Enable Sets the inverter operation when the multi function input terminal for safe operation mode is OFF 0 Free Run Cuts off the power to the inverter when the multi function terminal is OFF 1 Q Stop Uses the deceleration time Q Stop Time in safe ADV Run Dis Stop operation mode to decelerate inverter You must input the operation command again to enable this operation even if the multi function terminal is ON 2 Q Stop Resume Uses the safe operation mode deceleration time Q Stop Time to decelerate With the operation command ON the operation starts normally when the multi function terminal receives an input T S Sets the deceleration time if you set ADV 71 Run ADV LG Q Stop Time Dis Stop to 1 Q Stop or 2 Q Stop Resume 512 LSis 5 Applied
96. 2 56 Web Bypass 57 Web Splice Virtual 86 0h1756 Virt DI Status muti E state 0 Int 485 Comm Mon Monitor type 90 175A ai Dee oi Keypad tas o o o o o o 2 Field Bus RovFrame Number of 91 1758 N rs received 0 o o o o o frames Err Frame Number of i 1750 Num error rames d d 3 919 9 9 9 Number of 93 175D Nar prame write error 0 o o o o o lum frames gave Comm 0 No E E Update 4 1 Yes 0 2 E o o o o o 6 34 LSis 6 Table of Functions EE Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that only appear when setting corresponding codes Note 31 COM 06 17 and 94 only appear after you install the communication option card Please refer to the Options Manual for more information about the various options 6 8 Parameter Mode Application Function Group gt APP Control mode Communication Func Setting Reference S page L C F T T 00 z Jump Code Jump code 0 99 20 o o o o o o 0 None Traverse 3 2 2 Proc PID 48 O1Note Application 3 Reserved 0 5 18 pn 0h1801 AppMode ine ean in js Ro x o o o x x sequence aye Tension Ctrl Ext PID Ctr W Spd Close o o
97. 3 7 kW 1 1 2 WINDER UNWINDER OPERATION 2 1 IGVEIVIEW 1 sxssats t TI 2 1 2 2 Gen ral Gonfiguration ssssad aas sada d eret a 2 3 2 3 Main Speed Command Sochor eseista ieena a hEn 2 8 2 4 Jension Gomm nd Sectionin i a iit indian Mad Aa da ad 2 11 2 5 Web PID Controller Sections ss sii in sada eerte a nig 2 16 2 6 Diameter Computation Sections icicsccccsscscsecssssascsscstasasssseseiscsassessaanaysssicissssncsans 2 25 2 7 Final Speed Computation Section sss 2 33 2 8 Analog OPI Sod vias iun hcc dette rcp ph nh Vath ts T Pado 2 40 2 9 Final Tension Computation Section sssssssssseennnenne 2 41 2 10 Web Break Detection Section 2 42 2 11 Torque Limit Computation Section eese 2 44 2 12 Web Function without Diameter Computation Section sssssss 2 47 3 CAPSTAN OPERATION eeeeeeeeeeeetetetntnenanetn tn thats TS 3 1 3 1 OVGIVIOW 3 1 3 2 General Configuration 3 8 Main Speed Command Sechin z asa midea tn tntnin 3 4 3 4 Wob PID Controller Section dati ati eciam da Gad gk 3 4 3 5 Analog Output SectiorA s t tetendit de eec n neni 3 4 3 6 Web Break Detection Sotho ire iiisge ap dorai otie apean piai piirrin tarii a raias 3 4 3 7 Material Thickness Computation Section ssssssssssesee 3 5 LSis x Table of Contents x
98. 31 PID Out Inv Selects whether to invert the output of the PID controller Select Yes to invert the PID output code before it is output This code is useful in situations where the tension detectors such as the dancer or load cell are oriented oppositely APP32 PID Out Scale Adjusts the scale of the PID controller output First suppose that the PID controller is saturated In such a situation if this code is set to 100 the PID controller output is 100 When this code is set to 30 the PID controller output is 30 LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation APP51 PID Start Ramp Ramp time can be increased during the set time of PID output when the inverter initially starts This function smoothes the output of the PID controller at initial start up and improves transient phenomena like sloshing when starting the dancer or load cell Fig 1 5 1 b shows the output of the P controller at start up when the P gain is 100 and the PID error is 100 The dotted line in figure b shows the output of the P controller when APP51 PID Start Ramp is 0 sec The solid line in figure b shows that the output of the PID controller at initial start up tends to increase by the ramp time based on APP51 PID Start Ramp In other words the solid line in b is more advantageous than the dotted line in b due to the transient phenomena that exists when the inverter initially starts a b c PID error 96 A 1
99. 35 APP 55 only appears when APP54 Fixed PID En is set to No Note 36 APP 57 only appears when APP56 Profile P Mode is set to Linear or Square Note 41 It only appears when the APP 02 Tnsn Ctrl Mode is set to W_Spd Close UW Spd Close W Tens Close UW Tens Close and Capstan Application Function Group PAR gt APP Control mode Communication Function Reference address display page eroe Curent APP67 Current n Oh183D Curr Diameter diameter A air x 2 29 o o o x x display ie Note be Oh183E Curr Bobbin Suret bobbin Read Only 1 4 227 ololo x x isplay egnoe Bobbin 1 APP67 37 0h183F Bobbin1 Diamtr diameter 100 0 10 0 o 2 27 ojojojx x Gave Bobbin 2 APP67 37 0h1840 Bobbin2 Diamtr diameter 100 0 15 0 o ear ojojojx x hoe Bobbin 3 APP67 37 0h1841 Bobbin3 Diamtr diameter 100 0 20 0 o 2 27 ojojojx x eater Bobbin 4 APP67 37 0h1842 Bobbin4 Diamtr diameter 100 0 25 0 o 2 27 ojojojx x 67e Min bobbin E 37 0h1843 Min Diameter diameter 5 0 100 0 10 0 x 2 29 ojojojx x Gave Diameter 37 0h1844 Diameter LPF calculation filter 0 0 300 0 sec 50 0 o 2 29 ojojojx x Diameter 69 0h1845 Web Hold Freq calculation stop 0 30 00 Hz 5 00 o 2 31 ojojojx x q p filter o Keypad Selection of Vt 70 0h1846 MinDia Source min bobbin 2 n 0 Keypad x 2 29 ojojojx x diameter entry 3 v2 4 12 Note 0 No 7 0h1847 Thickness En
100. 4 36 only appear when an expansion IO board is installed LSis 62 6 Table of Functions 6 7 Parameter Mode Communication Function Group gt COM oet A Change Communication Function pete Reference y i _during_ address display T operation Jump Code Jump code Built in 0t 0h1701 Int485 St ID communication 0 250 1 o 5 o o oj ojo inverter ID o ModBus RTU 0 Built in 1 Reserved 02 0h1702 Int485 Proto communication ModBus o o o oj oj o protocol 2 LS Inv 485 m a Seria Debug 0 1200bps 1 2400bps Built in 2 4800 bps 3 03 0h1703 Int485 BaudR communication o o o oj oj o speed 3 9600bps 9600 bps 4 19200 bps 5 38400 bps 0 D8 PN S1 Built in 1 DBS PN S2 0 04 0h1704 Int485 Mode communication o o oj oj o frame setting 2 D8 PE S1 D8 PN S1 3 D8 PO S1 Transmission 05 0h1705 Resp Delay delay 0 1000 ms 5ms o 0 0 O O O after reception ogee Communication in FBus SW Ver LS scien 0 00 o Opin o o o o o 07 0h171B FBus ID RED 0 255 1 o Option o o o o o Pus FIELD BUS 08 0h1711 G st 12Mbps Option o o o o o BaudRate speed 09 0h171C FieldBus LED Communication E E o Option o o o o o option LED status 30 Oht71E Pace 0 8 3 o o o o o o lum 31 oht71F Para Stauts 1 Communications O000 FFFF oopa o o o o o o 32
101. 4 Regul Bypass 0 No No Yes APO 35 Auto Ch Mode 0 Aux None Aux Main E APO 36 Auto Ch Time gt 72 00 0 99 00 Min APO 38 Interlock 0 No No Yes APO 39 Interlock DT 5 0 0 1 360 0 Sec APO 40 Actual Pr Diff E 2 0 10096 LSis 5 Applied Functions keris Function display Setting display Setting range APO 41 Aux Acc Time 5 2 0 0 600 0 Sec APO 42 Aux Dec Time E 2 0 0 600 0 Sec OUT 31 33 Relay x or Q1 24 MMC OUT 34 36 Qx Define 24 MMC Basic Operation APP 01 APP Mode When you select No 3 MMC as the application function the items associated with the MMC function appear in the Option Card Function Group APO The functions associated with PID control appear in the Application Function Group APP APO 20 21 and 33 Set the number of auxiliary motors in APO 33 When one or more auxiliary motors exist enter the number of the auxiliary motor to operate first in APO 21 For example if there are 3 auxiliary motors and each is controlled by Relays 1 amp 2 and the Q1 terminal they operate in the order of Relay 2 Q1 and Relay 1 if you enter 2 in APO 21 They stop in the order of Relay 1 Q1 and Relay 2 which is opposite to the operation order In item APO 20 you can monitor the number of auxiliary motors currently in operation APO 23 26 Start Freq 1 4 Specifies the starting frequency of the auxiliary motor While operating the main motor using PID
102. 5 5 47 36 ASR Gain 2 5 38 37 ASRP PI 5 38 38 Timer In 571 39 Thermal In 40 Dis Aux Ref 5 1 41 SEO 1 5 72 42 SEQ2 5 72 43 Manual 5 72 44 Go Step 5 72 45 Hold Step 5 72 46 FWDJOG 5 6 47 REVJOG 5 6 48 TrqBias 49 Web Dis PID 2 17 50 Web Quik Stop 2 10 51 Web Hold 52 Web Preset 2 27 53 Web Bobbin L 2 27 54 Web Bobbin H 2 27 55 Web PI Gain2 2 22 56 Web Bypass 57 Web Splice 58 Web Taper Dis 243 59 Web Boost En 2 15 60 Web Down En 2 15 61 Ext Dis PID 62 Ext PI Gain2 6 22 LSis 6 Table of Functions Input Terminal Block Function Group PAR gt IN Control mode Communication Function Setting Reference address display range R page Multi function 85 Oh1555 DI On Delay input 0 10000msec 10 o o o o o o terminal on filter Multi function 86 Oh1556 DI Off Delay input 0 10000 msec 3 o o o o o o terminal off filter Multi P8 P1 function Acontact Sooo 87 0h1557 DINC NO Sel input NO 0000 x o o o o o contact B contact selection NC Operation 88 Oh1558 RunOn Delay command 0 100 sec 0 00 x o o o o o delay time Multi step 89 Oh1559 InCheck Time command 1 5000 msec 1 x o o o o o delay time State of the P8 P1 90 Oh155A Disttus funcion o Connection oooo o P o o o o o input On 0000 terminal 1 Open OFF LSis 9 3
103. 50 5 20 Automatic Restart Operation 5 21 Operation Sound Selection 5 22 Second Motor Operation with One Inverter ssssssseeeee 5 58 5 23 Bypass Operation Sce etc een o I ec e ctn decode e os 5 60 5 24 Cooling Fart Control 52 is added di dati did ti dn ic 5 25 Input Power Frequency Selection 5 26 Inverter Input Voltage Selectioni iiiter titer tri sitire penis 5 27 Reading Writing and Saving Parameters sss 5 62 5 28 Parameter InitializatiQn 6d hot le o vd seni nd anid 5 63 LSis Table of Contents 5 29 Hide Parameter Mode and Prohibit Parameter Changes sssss 5 64 5 30 Add User Group USRiGip i adi eene iei Per hd e ese ehe danced 5 66 5 91 Add Ma6ro Group ved eee hem ata eter inde ss 5 68 5 32 Easy Mat eiiiai aapna ipai gdiipedeita s E p Crea HP HE HH ij 5 69 5 33 Other Config CNF Mode Parameters sss 5 70 5 94 Timer EUnCtiOfi c4 cp ra rec Dre ideja Pera EM We eig vata a resa 5 71 5 35 Auto Sequence Operalioni cu i ko u as did a atis 5 72 5 86 Traverse Operation Function eese nennen nente tentent tn tntn nni 5 75 SA7 Brake Controls ND 5 76 5 38 Multi Function Output On Off Control Function m 5 79 5 39 MMG FUNCHON 71i eria parcet iet co Pond Reti ee Hd di niet 5 80 5 40 Regeneration Evasion Function for Prasgan stasen raea 5 87 TABLE OF FUNG HO
104. 6 Virtual DI 7 COM76 B5 Virtual DI 6 COM75 B4 Virtual DI 5 COM74 B3 Virtual DI 4 COM73 B2 Virtual DI 3 COM72 B1 Virtual DI 2 COM71 BO Virtual DI 1 COM70 78 LSis 7 iS7 Communication Common Areas Communic ation Parameter Assigned content by bit Address BI5 Reserved Bl4 Reserved BI3 Reserved BI2 Reserved BI Reserved BIO Reserved Digital Output B9 Reserved 0h0386 Conta B8 fesenved 0 Off 1 On B7 Reserved B6 Reserved B5 4 Expansion VO OUT36 None B4 3 Expansion VO OUT35 None B3 2 Expansion I O OUT34 None B2 1 Basic I O OUT33 None B1 Relay Basic I O OUT32 None BO Relay1 Basic VO OUT31 None 0h0387 Reserved Reserved 0h0388 PID reference 0 1 Give the PID reference command 0h0389 PID feedback value 0 1 96 PID feedback value 0h038A ORE Reserved 2o 0h0390 Torque Ref 0 1 96 Torque command 0h0391 Fwd Pos Torque Limit 0 1 Forward motoring torque limit 0h0392 Fwd Neg Torque Limit 0 1 96 Forward regenerative torque limit 0h0393 Rev Pos Torque Limit 0 1 96 Reverse motoring torque limit 0h0394 Rev Neg Torque Limit 0 1 Reverse regenerative torque limit 0h0395 Torque Bias 0 1 96 Torque bias 0h0396 W
105. 60 0h123C Step Freq 11 speed frequency Hz 4990 o o o o x x freguency 11 quency Multi step Step Freq 0 Max 61 0h123D HA speed frequency Hz 38 00 o o o o x x frequency 12 62 0h123E Step Freq Multi step 0 Max 25 00 o ololo x x 6 Table of Functions speed frequency Hz frequency 13 Multi step 63 Oh123F Sep ea speed ia rm 15 00 o e o o o x x frequency 14 frequency Hz Multi step Step Freq 0 Max 64 0h1240 S speed frequency Hz 5 00 o o o o x x frequency 15 Control mode Communication Function Setting Reference address display range page Multi step 70 0h1246 Acc Time 1 acceleration 0 600sec 20 0 o o o o x x time 1 Multi step 71 0h1247 Dec Time 1 deceleration 0 600sec 20 0 o o o o x x time 1 Multi step 42497 0h1248 Acc Time 2 acceleration 0 600 sec 30 0 o ojojojx x time 2 Multi step 73 0h1249 Dec Time 2 deceleration 0 600sec 30 0 o 2 46 o o o x x time 2 Multi step 74 0h124A Acc Time 3 acceleration 0 600sec 40 0 o o o o x x time 3 Multi step 75 0h1248 Dec Time 3 deceleration 0 600sec 40 0 o o o o x x time 3 EE Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that only appear when setting corresponding codes Note 4 The BAS 24 only appears when the DRV 09 cont
106. 7 1 you can see the 100 0 value input in APP72 Curr Thickness of each inverter when it stops When you begin operating the inverter the APP72 Curr Thickness of each inverter displays the estimated thickness that the iS7 computes for the web material If each capstan correctly determines the main speed and gear ral APP92 Max Main slowly changes wi If the APP72 Curr io and the system computes and inputs the correct value in Spd then the APP72 Curr Thickness code for each inverter hin the range of about 100 5 indicates that the value input in APP92 Max Main Spd is excessively low Moreover if the APP72 Curr Thickness value exceeds 120 during inverter operation it indica excessively high es that the value input in APP92 Max Main Spd is If an incorrect value is input in APP92 Max Main Spd check the output frequency of the inverter when you input the main speed 100 in this code Then enter the ou put frequency in APP92 Max Main Spd Or use the flux gear ratio or belt ratio measured with a portable tachometer and capstan diameter measured with a portable tachometer in Eq 2 7 4 to compute the value and then en For details on the test operation see the Appendices at the end of this document er it in APP92 Max Main Spd Thickness value falls below 80 during inverter operation it Make sure that multi function input Web Preset turns OFF If multi function
107. 7 Droop St Torque Specifies the torque at which to start the Droop Control function These values allow you to control the motor speed based on the load torque This function uses the following equation Torque reference DroopStTorque Droop speed Maximum frequency x DroopPerc x 4 f P a 100 torque DroopStTorque Speed Torque Switchover This function only operates in Vector Control mode You can use this function to shift from speed mode to torque mode or vice versa with the multi function input while operating the inverter cote Function display Initial settings display CON 68 SPD TRQ Acc T E 20 0 Sec CON 69 SPD TRQ Dec T E 30 0 Sec IN 65 75 Px Define 35 Speed Torque While operating the inverter in vector torque mode DRVO9 Vector DRV10 Yes turn ON the multi function input set to Speed Torque This switches from the LSis 5 5 Applied Functions 5 17 5 48 current mode to vector speed mode The mode changes based on the accel decel time set in CON codes 50 and 51 While operating the inverter in vector speed mode DRVO9 Vector DRV10 No turn ON the multi function input set to Speed Torque This switches from the current mode to vector torque mode Kinetic Energy Buffering If the input power fails the voltage of the inverter DC power decreases and the low voltage trip cuts off the power output During a power failure the system controls the inverter power fre
108. 8 83 only appear when the PLC option board is installed 6 42 LSis 6 Table of Functions Option Card Function Group PAR gt APO Control mode Communication Function Setting Initial Reference address display range value page Lic Lai 76 0h1A44 PLD Rd Data 1 el 0000 Option o o o o o 7 Oh1A45 PLD Rd Data 2 mls 0000 option o o o o o 78 Oh1A41 PLD Rd Data 3 Sel 0000 Option o o o o o 79 OhtA42 PLD Rd Data 4 Sed 0000 Opin o o o o o 80 Oh1A43 PLD Rd Data 5 sl 0000 Option o o o o o 81 0h1A44 PLD Rd Data 6 ml 0000 Option o o o o o 82 Oh1A45 PLD Rd Data 7 el 0000 Option o o o o o 83 Oh1A45 PLD Rd Data 8 e 0000 Option o o o o o LSis 4 6 Table of Functions 6 11 Parameter Mode Protection Function Group 2 PRT Control mode Communication Function Setting Reference range page Jump Code Jump code 0 99 Load 0 Normal 1 Heavy 04 0h1B04 Load Duty pad eva Duty o o o o o setting Duty 1_ Heavy Duty Bit 00 11 Open Input output 1 phase of 05 oh1B05 Phase Loss open phase output 00 o o o o o protection Open 2 phase of input Open phase of 06 0h1B06 IPO V Band input voltage 1 100V 40 o ojo oj o band 07 0h1B07 Trip Dec Time Goceleration 0 600 sec 30 o o o o o Selec
109. 9NZ Schiphol Rijk The Nether lands e mail junshickp Isis com Tel 31 20 654 1420 Fax 31 20 654 1429 N LSIS Middle East FZE Office Dubai UAE Address LOB 19 Jafza View Tower Room 205 Jebel Ali Free Zone P O Box 114216 Dubai UAE e mail jungyonglElsis com Tel 971 4 886 5360 Fax 971 4 886 5361 m Dalian LSIS Co Ltd Dalian China Address No 15 Liaohexi 3 Road Economic and Technical Deve lopment Zone Dalian 116600 China e mail lixk Isis com cn Tel 86 411 8273 7777 Fax 86 41 1 8730 7560 E LSIS Wuxi Co Ltd Wuxi China Address 102 A National High amp New Tech Industrial Development Area Wuxi Jiangsu 214028 China e mail xuha Isis com cn Tel 86 510 8534 6666 Fax 86 510 522 4078 m LSIS VINA Co Ltd Hanoi Vietnam Address Nguyen Khe Dong Anh Ha Noi Vietnam e mail srjoElsisvina com Tel 84 4 882 0222 Fax 84 4 882 0220 N LSIS VINA Co Ltd Hochiminh Vietnam Address 41 Nguyen Thi Minh Khai Str Yoco Bldg 4th FL Hochiminh City Vietnam e mail sbparkGlsisvina com Tel 84 8 3822 7941 Fax 84 4 3822 7942 N LSIS Tokyo Office Tokyo Japan Address 16th FL Higashi Kan Akasaka Twin Tower 17 22 2 chome Akasaka Minato ku Tokyo 107 8470 Japan e mail jschunaGlsis com Tel 81 3 3582 9128 Fax 81 3 3582 2667 N LSIS Shanghai Office Shanghai China Address Room E G 12th FL Huamin Empire Plaza No 726 West Yan an Road Shanghai 200050 China e mail jinhkGIsis com
110. AUT 21 Y Reverse gt lt __ gt lt _ gt lt AUT 11 AUT 12 AUT 15 AUT 16 Px SEQ L Ji AUT 19 Output frequency Sequence 2 Output frequency Px SEQ L Px Go Step 574 LSis 5 Applied Functions 5 36 Traverse Operation Function Group Code number Function display Initial settings display APP 01 App Mode 1 Traverse APP 08 Trv Amplit 96 0 0 APP 09 Trv Scramb 0 0 APP 10 Trv Acc Time 2 0 Sec APP 11 Trv Dec Time 3 0 Sec APP 12 Trv Offset Hi 0 0 APP 13 Trv Offset Lo 0 0 IN 65 75 Px Define 27 Trv Offset Lo IN 65 75 Px Define 28 Trv Offset Hi APP 01 App Mode Selects the Application Function Mode App Mode to No 1 Traverse Displays the functions necessary for the traverse operation APP 08 Trv Amplit Selects the magnitude of the raverse operation frequency Set as a percentage of the operation frequency APP 09 Trv Scramb Selects the magnitude of the scramble operation frequency Sets the magnitude of the frequency jump at the start of deceleration Trv Amp Frequency Operation frequency TrvAmpliffo as shown in the following figure Trv Scr frequency Trv Amp frequency APP 10 Trv Acc Time APP11 Trv Dec Time Specifies the accel decel time of the traverse operation APP 12 Trv Offset Hi Selecting and entering the No 28 Trv Offset Hi functions in the multi funct
111. Common Areas Communic ation Address Parameter Assigned content by bit BI5_ Fuse Open Trip BM Overheat Trip BI3_ Arm Short BI2 External Trip BI1_ Overvoltage Trip BIO Overcurrent Trip B9 NTC Trip a B8_ Overspeed Deviation 0h0330 Latch type trip information 1 B7 Overspeed B6 Input open phase trip B5 Output open phase trip B4 Ground Fault Trip B3 E Thermal Trip B2 Inverter Overload Trip Bi Underload Trip BO Overload Trip BI5_ Reserved BI4_ Reserved The safety option on the terminal block input blocks the BI3 inverter output only for products with a rated power of 90 kW or higher BI2_ Bad contact of Slot3 option card BI1_ Bad contact of Slot2 option card BI0_ Bad contact of Slot option card B9 No Motor trip 0h0331 Latch type trip information 2 B8 External brake trip B7 Bad contact of basic IO board B6 Pre PID Fail B5 Error while writing parameters B4 Reserved B3 FAN Trip B2 PTC thermal sensor trip B1 Encoder Error Trip BO MC Fail Trip LSis 75 7 iS7 Communication Common Areas Communic ation Parameter Assigned content by bit Address B15 Reserved B14 Reserved B13 Reserved B12 Reserved B11 Reserved B10 Reserved B9 Reserved 0h0332 Level t
112. EB Alow voltage trip may occur during the deceleration phase of the energy buffering operation due to a momentary power interruption or the load inertia During the energy buffering operation the motor may vibrate under loads other than the variable torque load load from the fans and pumps LSis 5 Applied Functions 5 18 Energy Saving Operation m Manual Energy Saving Operation Code Group number Funci display Setting display Unit ADV 50 E Save Mode 1 Manual ADV 51 Energy Save 30 f the inverter output current is less than the current set in BAS 14 Noload Curr motor no load current then the output voltage is reduced by the amount set in ADV 51 The voltage before the energy saving operation starts becomes the base value as a percentage The energy saving operation does not work during acceleration and deceleration Current N 51 Output voltage W Automatic Energy Saving Operation Code number Function display Setting display Unit Group ADV 50 E Save Mode 2 Auto The system automatically calculates the amount of energy savings based on the rated current of the motor BAS 13 and the no load current BAS 14 and then it adjust the output voltage accordingly If the operation frequency changes or acceleration deceleration is initiated by a stop command or other command during the energy saving operation the Acc Dec time
113. Functions overcurrent trip or reverse deceleration error Select Speed Search for sensorless vector control if you want the inverter to start during a motor free run CON 71 Speed Search Speed search setting during acceleration 0001 2 Setting the Torque Reference You can set the torque reference in the same manner as the frequency reference Selecting torque control mode deactivates the frequency reference DRV 08 Trq Ref Src Selects the torque reference type 0 Keypad 1 1 keypad 2 Use the keypad to input the torque reference value CON 02 Cmd Torque sets the torque command Depending on the rated torque of the motor you can set it up to 180 2 V1 3 1 You can use the voltage V1 or current I1 terminal block of the inverter to input the torque reference Use the IN 02 Torque at 100 item to set the maximum torque For example if you set IN 02 to 20096 and use the current input V1 to set the torque reference then the torque limit is 200 at a 20 mA input current when the function of the I1 terminal is set to the factory default setting You can see the setting in monitor MON mode Select 19 Torque Ref in CFG codes 06 08 which are the codes that set Config CFG mode options 6 Int 485 Use the inverter terminal block s communication terminal to set the torque limit 3 Speed Limit When operating the inverter in torque control mode different load conditions may cause it to operate faster th
114. G Frequency 10 00 Pec DRV 12 JOG Acc Time 20 00 0 600 sec DRV 13 JOG Dec Time 7 30 00 0 600 sec IN 55475 Px Define 6 JOG Px P1 P8 P9 P11 option Select a multi function terminal block between P1 and P11 to serve as the jog frequency setting terminal and then select No 6 JOG as the function for one of terminal blocks ranging from IN 65 to IN 75 If you input the jog terminal with an operation command input the operation frequency moves to the jog frequency explained below DRV 11 Jog Frequency Jog frequency Specifies the frequency for jog operation The jog operation is assigned top priority except the Dwell operation Therefore if you input a jog terminal while operating the inverter at any speed including multi step operations up down operations or 3 wire operations it operates according to the jog frequency LSis 55 5 Applied Functions 5 6 DRV 12 JOG Acc Time DRV 13 JOG Dec Time These are the accel and decel times for moving at the jog frequency DRV 11 JOG Frequency 10 00 ee Hz DRV 12 JOG Acc Time 20 00 0 600 sec DRV 18 JOG Dec Time 30 00 0 600 sec IN 65 75 Px Define 46 FWD JOG IN 65 75 Px Define 47 REVJOG jog REV JOG Px P1 P8 P9 P11 option Jog Operation 1 requires an operation command but Jog Operation 2 can carry out the jog operation using a terminal set to forward jog FWD JOG or reverse During j
115. M3 KM4 5 Applied Functions 2 Main You can automatically change motors without separating the main motor from the auxiliary motors The auto change condition is met when the accumulated operating time of the motor connected to the inverter output exceeds the auto change time APO 36 The motor operating order automatically changes when the inverter stops due to a stop command or slip operation mode For example if you set the starting auxiliary motor selection APO 21 to No 2 motor 2 is connected to the inverter output If the total number of the motors is 4 then the motors operate in the order of 3 4 and 1 when the operating condition of the auxiliary motors is met Therefore if you stop the inverter after the auto change condition is met motor 3 is connected to the inverter output for the next restart and the auxiliary motors operate in the order of 4 1 and 2 3 phase input RST Inverter UVW t Es TH T LT KD1 II d KD2 KD3 KD4 SS y ENN NN NNE NAN AK KM1 KM2 KM3 KM4 M1 M2 M3 584 LSIS 5 Applied Functions Interlock This function stops a faulty motor in operation and replaces it with a stationary motor for continuous operation Connect a fault signal to the inverter i
116. Material 1 Yes x 37 ololo x x thickness 1 Yes 6 38 LSis 6 Table of Functions Communication Function Setting Change Reference Control mode computation selection qoNw Current 38 0h1848 Curr Thickness thickness 10 0 100 0 100 0 X 3 7 O Oo O X X display The initial 73 0h1849 Init Boost Tns tension 100 0 500 0 150 0 o k X X O X X increase value Material kto 745 0h184A Thickness LPF AREE 0 0 300 0sec 30 0 o 38 o o o x x filter Min bobbin 75 0h184B MinDia Value diameter Read Only 2 29 o o o x x monitor Selection of o None 76 Oh184C Web BrkEn Web break Warning 1 o 242 olo o x x detection Warning function 2 Free run Web function kto n on184D Web Brk St Diy oot 0 0 300 0sec 10 0 o 242 ololo x x startup 7gNote Web function 39 Oh184E Web Brk Dly detection delay 0 0 300 0 sec 5 0 o 2 42 O OJ O X X time joe Web function i ios Oh184F Web Brk Lev Hi detection upper Pure 80 0 o 2 43 o o o x x limit ii goo Web function 29 Oh1850 Web Brk Lev Lo detection lower 0 0 APP79 20 0 o 2 43 ojojo x x limit Note 37 APP 61 68 only appear when APP02 Tnsn Ctrl Mode is set to a mode other than Capstan Note 38 APP 71 74 only appear when APP02 Tnsn Ctrl Mode is set to Capstan Note 39 APP 77 80 only appear when APP76 Web Brk En is
117. Min Diameter Eg 1 7 8 ins gt Upper level Upper level irection o a control ler control ler material movement Direction of material movement Bobbin 2 3 Fig 1 7 2 Conceptual diagram of splicing Fig 1 7 2 illustrates the usual structure of winder splicing systems The operation sequence of the structure shown in Fig 1 7 2 is as follows When Bobbin 1 is almost completely full it sends a signal to inform the upper level controller Fig 1 7 2 1 The upper level controller then issues an ON signal to the inverter multi function input specified in 57 Web Splice that controls empty Bobbin 2 Fig 1 7 2 2 The inverter interrupts the output of the Web PID controller In this situation the inverter uses a combination of the main speed command and APP93 Splice Level as the command value as shown in Eq 1 7 6 Eq 1 7 8 to activate empty Bobbin 2 Fig 1 7 2 3 238 LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation The axis between the bobbins rotates 180 degrees so Bobbins 1 and 2 switch position Fig 1 7 2 4 Bobbin 2 sends a signal to the upper level controller to confirm that the switch is complete Fig 1 7 2 5 The upper level controller sends an OFF signal to the inverter s corresponding multi function input specified in 57 Web Splice to control Bobbin 2 which interrupts the splicing operation Then the Web PID controller resumes operatio
118. NS cene as s 6 1 6 1 Parameter Mode Drive Group DRV sssssessssrsressrsreseesrenessrsseneenresersrsnenses 6 1 6 2 Parameter Mode Basic Function Group BAS 6 4 6 3 Parameter Mode Expanded Function Group PAR ADV 6 8 6 4 Parameter Mode Control Function Group CON 6 18 6 5 Parameter Mode Input Terminal Block Function Group IN 6 19 6 6 Parameter Mode Output Terminal Block Function Group SOUT 6 24 6 7 Parameter Mode Communication Function Group COM 6 8 Parameter Mode Application Function Group APP 6 35 6 9 Parameter Mode Application Function Group 2 9AP2 ssssssss 6 41 6 10 Parameter Mode Option Card Function Group 2 APO 6 42 6 11 Parameter Mode Protection Function Group PRT sssssssee 6 44 6 12 Parameter Mode 2nd Motor Function Group M2 999 un 6 48 6 13 Trip mode TRP Current or LAA ae e e TA enne 6 49 6 14 Config Mode CNF IS7 COMMUNICATION COMMON AREAS esent te tete tntnenan 7 1 7 1 iS7 Monitoring Common Areas s 7 1 7 2 Common Areas for iS7 Control uice rai inertes pe vistas ak 7 8 7 3 Common Areas for iS7 Dedicated Product Monitoring sssss 7 10 LSis x Table of Contents 7 4 Common Areas for iS7 Dedicated product control sss 7 11 APPENDIX A SAMPLE WEB
119. O X X Torque Torque controller 52 0h1434 Out LPF output filter 0 2000 msec 0 x 5 38 X X X O O 0 Keypad 1 1 Keypad 2 2 V1 3 n 4 v2 B i x x x x o o re Otis Torque Lmt Setting torque es sins Gs Src limit 7 Encoder 8 FieldBus 9 PLC 10 Synchro Binary ki Type Note Positive direction Sha 0h1436 AN reverse 0 200 180 0 o 5 38 x x x o o Toraue limit Positive direction 55 0h1437 id ij regeneration 0 200 180 0 o 5 38 x x x o o Toraue limit Negative 56 0h1438 REV Trg Lmt direction reverse 0 200 180 0 o 5 38 X X X O O Torque limit Negative direction 57 0h1439 REV Trq Lmt regeneration 0 200 180 0 o 5 38 X X X OJ O Torque limit E Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that only appear when setting corresponding codes Note 18 CON 45 47 only appear if an encoder board is inserted Note 19 CON 54 57 only appear when DRV 09 Control Mode is set to Sensorless 1 2 or Vector LSis 95 6 Table of Functions Control Function Group PAR 3 CON Noe Control icati n Change mode Communication Function Setting Garin Reference address displa range age Bey 9 operation peg 0 Keypad 1 1 Keypad 2 2 Vi meus DE orque bias 58 Oh143A Trq Bias Src ki 4 va 0 Keypad x 5 38 x x o x x setting method 1 5 12 6 Int485 7 FieldBu
120. ON 91 only appears when CON90 ASR P Pro Mode is set to Linear or Square 6 18 LSis 6 Table of Functions 6 5 Parameter Mode Input Terminal Block Function Group 3 IN Control mode Communication Function Setting Reference address display range page Jump Code Jump code 0 99 Frequency at Start frequency Fi 01 Oh1501 b Tanalod Max 60 00 o o o xX x at 100 ith frequency Hz Torque at maximum 02 0h1502 Torque at100 analog 0 200 100 0 x x o o o input 05 0h1505 V1 Monitor V V kt ra 0 10V 0 00 o o o oj o Selects the V1 0 Unipolar 0 06 0h1506 V1 Polarity Oo o Oojojo Y input polarity 1 Bipolar Unipolar Time constant of 0 07 0h1507 V1 Filter V1 input filter U00 aise 10 Oo o Oojojo 08 Oh1508 V1 Volt x1 pet 0 10V 0 00 o o o o o Output at V1 09 0h1509 V1 Perc yt minimum 0 100 0 00 0ojojojojo voltage 10 Oh150A V1 Volt x2 perd 0 10V 10 00 o o o o o Output at V1 11 Oh150B V1 Perc y2 maximum 0 100 100 00 Oo o Oojojo voltage Note b Oh150C V1 Volt xt issu 10 0V 0 00 o o o oj o Output at V1 13 Oh150D V1 Perc y1 minimum 100 0 0 00 o jojojojo voltage 14 0h150E V1 Volt x2 eaS 10 0V 10 00 o o o o o Output at V1 15 Oh150F V1 Perc y2 maximum 100 0 100 00 ojojojojo voltage 16 0h1510 V1 Inverting Changing No 0 No o o
121. On On Bobbin4 APP66 For example suppose that there are 4 kinds of bobbin as shown in the following figure For these bobbins you must enter the computed values i e 14 2 28 5 35 7 and 50 0 in APP63 66 Bobbin Diamtr respectively You must also enter 14 2 i e the diameter of Bobbin1 in APP67 Min Diameter since it is the smallest bobbin Select the currently installed bobbin using a combination of multi function input Web Bobbin L and Web Bobbin H and then switch multi function input Web Preset from On Off to initialize it LSis 2 27 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 350 omm mm 250mm 200mm 100mm Bobbin 1 Bobbin 2 Bobbin 3 Bobbin 4 100mm 700mm 100 200mm 700mm 100 250mm 700mm 100 350mm 700mm 100 14 21 28 5 35 7 50 0 Fig 1 6 1 Various bobbin sizes When you replace a bobbin always switch multi function input Web Preset from On Off You cannot compute the new diameter if multi function input Web Preset remains ON 228 LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 Diameter Computation Code Factory Group number Funi Name default Range Current diameter APP 61 Curr Diameter display 95 Read Only Keypad value of APP 67 Min Diameter minimum bobbin 10 0 5 0 100 0 diameter APP 68 Diameter LPF Diameter 30 0 sec 0 0 300 0 se
122. Operation 2 12 Web Function without Diameter Computation Section DiaComp PIDLev PID Output AP282 HE a Ul PID Output Other 0 Yes 1 1 AL AP287 fe Current output Ut Joy Couputrequeney AP frequency Hz Hz omer p d LPE Dia Comp Gain Xcel Comp En Steady Chk No Lev LPF Compensation Steady Chk dea gt a gain X LPF Dia Comp Set Dia Comp LPF 1 Compensation Gain Computation If you do not have information concerning the diameter of the bobbin used for closed loop tension control systems or you use more bobbins than previously specified you can control the bobbin without compensating for the diameter computation If you select Yes in AP2 80 you can compute the speed command using the main speed compensation gain and PID output value The web function without diameter computation is only valid in closed loop speed control mode APP02 W Spd Close UW Spd Close Before operation you can set the compensation gain AP2 81 Once the system starts you can compute the compensation gain by comparing the PID output value with the reference value of AP2 83 The value of the current computed gain in use appears in AP2 82 When the system stops the AP2 82 value reverts to the initial AP2 81 compensation gain setting Code Function Factory number default Selection of web 0 No
123. P1 P8 Curr Thickness Ho Operating JOG FWD REV JOG P1 P8 L 5 Web Dis PID P1 P8 Y H Web PID En Yes In3 D Web Break i i Fig 2 7 1 illustrates continuous processing in a closed loop tension control system The web material becomes thinner as the process continues However the volume of web material input into each capstan remains constant Thus as shown in Fig 2 7 1 if we suppose that the web material thickness input into Capstan 1 2 and 3 is 2 mm 8 mm and 10 mm respectively then we can conclude that the web material length input into Capstan 1 2 and 3 will be 100 cm 25 cm and 20 cm Therefore Capstan 1 must rotate faster than Capstan 2 and 3 Capstan 1 Capstan 2 Capstan 3 in order to handle the web material normally in a continuous process without any downward deflection or upper bias LSis 35 3 Capstan Operation Direction of movement Capstan 3 Capstan 2 Tension detector Capstan 1 Tension detector 4 20 mA Tension detector 4 20 ma Tension detector Winder Length 100 cm Fig 2 7 1 Capstan operating mechanism Thus in a tension control system we can draw a correlation between the capstan flux motor speed and web material thickness in a continuous process as shown in Eq 2 7 1 Motor speed rpm Wire speed mpm Basethicknes of materials m Eq 2 7
124. PID DRV20 Max Freg DRV20 Inverter Upper level OhDOF bt T LR Max Freg x xx Hz a controller External PID DRV20 Max Freg DRV20 Inverter Upper level OhD10 S EME Max Freg x RPM R controller Note 1 When APP05 Main Spd Src is set to Int485 Fieldbus or PLC you can receive the main speed command from Int485 or relevant options Fieldbus PLC via the common area 0hD85 0hD87 LSis 5 4 Other Functions gia xg ANANO did 01 OPON WOV OZ vL 2 L1nO POY LOY indino enDojeuy Z indjno wa 010 0 indino ZH 400X0 indjno 300X0 SsoJppe uuo I 1es Old paxi4 UIN U3 Old pexi4 110 8d 1d guie9 id 1x3 IEA 8 4 Old uleg Zl d Old uteg i d Old 001 31100 did X x jeu peeds uren 1nding did S94 4 U3 Old qoM A wey ajeg dd wu 11E1S Gidino did 1N0 did 01 0ld ain kH A E ao d AU INO Old wu IH Qld 110 8d 1d Ald 10 1x3 IBA 20105 110 8d ld jeu did jou Old je919 W19 aug pdg uen 195 1848 Old 195 pas uren 4 6 4 Other Functions 1 The analog output of the basic I O is 0 10 V 4 20 mA so the external PID controller always exerts a positive output Extended I O options have different analog output ranges such as 0 10 V 4 20 mA or 10 10 V
125. PID Control 1 Basic PID Operation This is the most common type of automatic control The P in PID stands for proportional the stands for integral and the D stands for differential Combining hese three elements provides flexible control for the system Function display APP 01 App Mode 2 Proc PID 0 4 APP 16 PID Output APP 17 PID Ref Value APP 18 PID Fdb Value APP 19 PID Ref Set 50 00 100 100 APP 20 PID Ref Source 0 Keypad 0 10 APP 21 PID F B Source 0 v1 0 10 APP 22 PID P Gain 50 0 0 1000 APP 23 PID I Time 10 0 0 32 0 Sec APP 24 PID D Time 0 0 1000 msec APP 25 PID F Gain 0 0 0 1000 96 APP 26 P Gain Scale 100 0 0 100 APP 27 PID Out LPF 0 0 10000 msec APP 29 PID Limit Hi 60 00 0 300 Hz APP 30 PID Limit Lo 0 5 0 300 Hz APP 31 PID Out Inv No 0 1 APP 32 PID Out Scale 100 0 0 1 1000 APP 34 Pre PID Freg z 0 00 fea Hz APP 35 Pre PID Exit 0 0 0 100 APP 36 Pre PID Delay 600 0 9999 Sec APP 37 PID Sleep DT 60 0 0 999 9 Sec APP 38 PID Sleep Freg 2 0 00 eae Hz APP 39 PID WakeUp Lev 35 0 100 LSis 5 Applied Functions Brae Function display Setting display je APP 40 PID WakeUp Mod 0 Below Level 0 2 APP 42 PID Unit Sel 0 Hz 0 12 APP 43 PID Unit Gain 3 100 0 0 650 96 APP 44 PID Unit Scale 2 X1 0 2 APP 45 PID P2 Gain 100 0 0 1000
126. Select No 3 UserGrp SelKey from the multi function key unctions Even if the aforementioned multi function key is set to UserGrp SelKey the user group USR Grp does not appear unless you register the user group parameter W Registering Parameters in User Group USR Grp First select Multi Key in CNF Mode Code 42 and then the No 3 UserGrp SelKey 1 icon appears at the top of the screen In PAR mode go to the parameter you want to register and press MULTI Key For example press MULTI Key in Cmd Frequency DRV Group Code No 1 to open the following screen Or 00 64 CODE Screen description 1 Parameter group and code number to register 2 Name of the parameter to register 3 Code number to register in the user group if you press PROG ENT Key at 40 it is registered in the user group code No 40 4 Information about the parameter previously registered in user group code No 40 5 User group s code setting range 0 means cancellation of code setting LSis 5 Applied Functions Order Description You can set No 3 in the display screen shown above And then select the code 3 number you want and press the PROG ENT key When a value changes in No 3 the values shown in No 4 also change No 4 4 shows the information of the parameters previously registered and if none is registered in the code number Empty Code is displayed 0 is cancellation of code setting These
127. Sis 1 IS 6 Table of Functions No Communication Function Setting Note Control address range mode Sensorless 2 5 38 Vector 5 45 Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that only appear when setting corresponding codes Note 1 This indicates the effectiveness of each code depending on the control mode setting V F V F mode including PG SL Sensorless 1 and 2 modes VC Vector mode SLT Sensorless 1 and 2 Torque modes VCT Vector Torque mode Please refer to the Options Manual provided separately for more information on the various options Drive Group PAR 3 DRV Control mode Communication Function Setting Reference v address display CUI i page C T 0 No 5 82 10 0h110A Torque Torju 0 No x x x x o o Control Control Yes 5 34 5 45 Jog 0 5 Max 11 0h110B Frequency 99 freguency frequency Hz 19 00 o 5556 o o o o o Jog Operation Jog Acc 12 Oh110C Mae Acceleration 0 600 sec 20 0 o 5556 O O O O O time Jog Dec 109 Operation 13 Oh110D p aid Deceleration 0 600 sec 30 0 o 55 56 O O O X X time 0 02 KW 1 0 4 kW 2 75 KW 3 1 5 kW 4 2 2 KW 5 8 7 kw 6 5 5 KW 7 7 5 kW Changes Motor Motor KW depending 5 16 5 25 5 14 0h110E on the x 25 olololo o Capacity Capacity 10 18 5 Bs 32 KW 11 22 KW capacity 12 30 kW 13 37 KW 14 45 kW 15 55 KW 16 75 kW 17 90 kW 18 110 kW 19 132 kW 20 160 KW
128. Thus the external PID controller can exert both positive and negative outputs As shown in the preceding table the PID output of the external PID controller has communication addresses such as OhDOE output OhDOF Hz output and OhD10 RPM output Moreover negative outputs are treated as a two s complement value For example if the current PID output is 15 23 64013 is saved in the COM address of OhDOE This is because 64013 is a complement of 2 for 1523 A value obtained after inverting all of the bits and adding one LSis 4 7 4 Other Functions IN 65 72 Px Define Multi function input setting Ext Dis PID IN 65 72 Px Define Multi function input setting Ext PI Gain2 x IN 65 72 Px Define Multi function input setting I Term Clear E 0 None 1 Traverse 2 Proc PID APP 01 App Mode Application selection None 3 MMC 4 Auto Seq 5 Tension Ctrl 6 Ext PID Ctrl APP 16 PID Output PID output monitor Read Only 6 APP 17 PID Ref Value PID reference monitor Read Only 6 APP 18 PID Fdb Value PID feedback monitor Read Only APP 19 PID Ref Set pip reference serung 50 00 100 100 Keypad 0 Keypad 1 V1 2 n 3 v2 APP 20 PID Ref Src PID reference selection 0 Keypad 4 12 5 Int 485 6 Encoder 7 Fieldbus 8 PLC 0 V1 1 n 2 v2 APP 21 PID F B Src PID feedback selection PH 3 12
129. Timer In Out 55 Q1 Timer Out LSis 57 5 Applied Functions 5 35 Auto Sequence Operation Group Code number Function display Initial settings display APP 01 App Mode 4 Auto Sequence IN 65 75 Px Define 4 SEQ 1 IN 65 75 Px Define 42 SEQ 2 IN 65 75 Px Define 43 Manual IN 65 75 Px Define 44 Go Step IN 65 75 Px Define 45 Hold Step OUT 31 32 Relay 1 2 20 Step Pulse OUT 33 Q1 Define 21 Seq Pulse APP 01 App Mode Select No 4 Auto Sequence to display the Auto Sequence Group AUT in Parameter mode You can set the type of auto sequence operation the accel decel time frequency rotation direction etc for each step IN 65 75 Px Define For auto sequence operation you should use the multi function input terminal e 41 SEQLL 42 SEQ M Selects the type of sequence for the auto sequence operation There are two possible sequence operations You can enter different data for each sequence If you enter a terminal specified as an SEQ 1 terminal the system operates based on the data entered in Sequence 1 If you enter a terminal specified as an SEQ 2 terminal the system operates based on the data entered in Sequence 2 43 Manual If you enter a terminal specified as a No 43 Manual terminal while the device is stopped in Auto Sequence Operation mode it changes to the operation command and the frequency command set in DRVO6 Cmd Source and DRVO7 Freq Ref Src
130. You can see the setting in monitor MON mode Select 21 Torque Bias in CFG06 08 which are the Config CFG mode items IN 65 75 Px Define If the multi function input is set to 48 Trq Bias and the multi function input is not ON then the system ignores any Torque Bias value entered via the keypad analog or communication inputs CON 60 Trq BiasFF Depending on the rotational direction of the motor you can add this code to the torque bias level to compensate for any losses When you input a negative value the torque bias level decreases by the set amount Zero speed control when the inverter stops Hold Time CON 11 Hold Time Performs a zero speed operation for the amount of time specified after a stop command decelerates and stops the motor This cuts off the output flow after the time elapses Hold Time Output voltage i Frequency Operation command 544 LSis 5 Applied Functions 5 14 Torque Control Controlling the Torque Torque control refers to controlling the motor to ensure that the torque output matches the torque command The motor RPM remains constant when the motor output torque is balanced with the motor load torque Thus the motor RPM depends on the load for torque control To control the torque the motor RPM increases when the output torque of the motor exceeds the amount required for the load on the motor In order to avoid this you must set the speed limit to pre
131. ai CON 05 PWM Mode 1 PWM Low Leakage E PWM CON 04 Carrier Freq Selects the operation sound generated by the motor The power device IGBT in the inverter generates the high frequency switching voltage and applies it to the motor This high frequency is also called the carrier requency If the carrier frequency is high the operation sound decreases If it is low the motor operation sound increases CON 05 PWM Mode Reduces the heat loss and leakage current generated in he inverter based on the load When you select Low Leakage PWM the heat oss and leakage current is less than those in Normal PWM however the noise generated by the motor increases The following table lists the advantages and disadvantages of selecting the various carrier frequency sizes and load rates Carrier frequency Carrier Freq 0 7 kHz 15 kHz LowLeakage PWM Normal PNM Motor noise S Increasement V Decreasement Heat generated V Decreasement S Increasement Noise generated Y Decreasement S Increasement Leakage current V Decreasement S Increasement The following table lists the factory default carrier frequencies for each inverter capacity 0 75 22 kW 30 45 kW 55 75 kW 90 110 kW 132 160 kW 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 3 kHz 3 kHz Max 15 kHz Max 10 kHz Max 7 kHz Max 6 kHz Max 5 kHz LSis 5 Applied Functions PAR gt CON N STP
132. all Src Sel is set to 1 V1 If 5 V is input as the current V1 then the stall level of the inverter is 75 150 5V 10V Moreover PRT49 Stall Disp displays the result of this calculation which is 75 in this case LSis 1 4 Other Functions 4 2 2 Automated Speed torque Switching The motor automatically starts in speed mode when set to a torque mode that uses a Sensorless 1 Sensorless 2 Sensored vector but if the set frequency CON86 is at an abnormal level it reverts to torque mode The motor sometimes fails to start at low torque commands c a less than 10 under certain load characteristics particularly in the Sensorless 1 Sensorless 2 torque mode When this occurs you can start the motor in speed mode to take advantage of the excellent start characteristics regardless of the load Once the motor starts the motor reverts to torque mode through automatic switching This allows you to run the motor in a stable torque mode This switching function is useful for open loop winders unwinders without a tension detector such as a dancer or load cell Output CON87 Trq Exch Dec Free run stop frequency Hz when set to Torque a A y Hz CON87 Trq Exch Dec Deceleration stop when set to Speed CON86 Trq Exch Freq _ o Torq Torque command EC torque mode Torque amount speed mode 7 gt SAT LA CON88 Trq Exch Ramp t Operation comma
133. ameter Write 1 Yes gt CNF 48 Parameter Save 1 Yes This function copies the parameters saved in the inverter body to the keypad or he parameters saved in the keypad to the inverter body CNF 46 Parameter Read Copies the parameters saved in the inverter body to he keypad This deletes all of the existing parameters saved in the keypad CNF 47 Parameter Write Copies the parameters saved in the keypad to the inverter body This deletes all of the existing parameters saved in the keypad If an error occurs while writing the parameters you can use the existing data saved as they are An EEP Rom Empty message appears if there is no data saved in the keypad 562 LSis 5 Applied Functions CNF 48 Parameter Save Since the parameters set via communication are saved in the RAM they are all deleted when you turn the inverter On or Off If you set the parameters via communication and select Yes in CNF 48 Parameter Save then the parameters remain even if you turn the inverter On or Off 5 28 Parameter Initialization Code Mode number Function display Initial settings display CNF 40 Parameter Init 0 No You can initialize the parameters changed by the user to the factory default settings You can initialize the data en bloc for all groups or for individual groups You cannot initialize the parameters if a trip occurs or while the inverter is operating 1 All Groups Initializes all
134. an imaginary tension control system and the basic mechanical information from the winder unwinder and capstan to describe how to set the parameters for each inverter and perform a test drive Fig A1 1 provides an outline of this imaginary tension control system Direction of movement Capstan 3 Capstan 2 Capstan 1 Tension detector Tension detector Tension Tension detector detector 4 Unwinder Winder Length 20 cm Length 25 cm Length 100 cm Fig A1 1 An imaginary tension control system Table A1 1 lists mechanical information for each inverter depicted in Fig A1 1 Generally the manufacturer of the machine provides this information Table A1 1 An imaginary tension control system Unwinder Capstan 3 Capstan 2 Capstan 1 Winder Number of poles 4 4 4 4 4 Min diameter m 0 3 0 6 0 6 0 6 04 Belt ratio gear ratio 1 6 5 1 13 4 1 9 7 173 144 Max linear speed mpm 250 Note 1 250 Note 1 340 Note 2 450 Note 3 600 Note 4 Max linear speed measured between the unwinder and capstan 3 Note 2 Max linear speed measured between capstan 3 and capstan 2 Max linear speed measured between capstan 2 and capstan 1 Max linear speed measured between capstan 1 and the winder LSis Appendix B Setting the Parameters Appendix B Setting the Parameters B 1 B 2 Setting Winder Parameters 1 LSis Use th
135. an the maximum speed Therefore you must use the speed limit function to avoid such speed divergences CON 62 Speed Lmt Src Selects the method for setting the speed limit value 0 Keypad 1 1 keypad 2 Use the keypad to set the speed limit value Set the forward speed limit value in CON 41 FWD Speed Lmt and set the reverse speed limit value in CON 42 REV Speed Lmt 2 V1 3 11 6 Int 485 Operates in the same way as the frequency command setting You can see the setting in monitor MON mode Select 421 Torque Bias in CFG 546 LSis 5 Applied Functions 5 15 5 16 codes 06 08 which are the codes that set the Config CFG mode option CON 65 Speed Lmt Gain If the motor speed exceeds the set speed limit set the reduction ratio of the torque reference Select No 35 Speed Torque as the function of the multi function input terminal and then input it while the inverter is stopped This allows you to shift from torque control mode to vector control speed control mode to operate the inverter Droop Control When you use multiple motors to drive a single load you can use Droop Control to balance the load or prevent speed controller saturation in vector control or equivalent modes Function display Initial settings display CON 66 Droop Perc E 0 0 96 CON 67 Droop St Torque 2 100 0 CON 66 Droop Perc Sets the ratio of the speed command to the rated torque of motor CON 6
136. and No 1 Always On always activated Operates the cooling fan when power is applied to the inverter No 2 Temp Control Temperature monitoring Operates the cooling fan when the heat sink reaches a certain temperature regardless of whether power is applied to the inverter or an operation command is input In products with a capacity of 11 75 kW even if ADV 64 is set to During Run the cooling fan may activate as a protective measure if the heat sink reaches a certain temperature due to harmonic waves or noise in the input current LSis 561 5 Applied Functions 5 25 Input Power Frequency Selection Code Group number Function display Initial settings display BAS 10 60 50 Hz Sel 0 60 Hz Select the input power frequency When you change this setting from 60 Hz to 50 Hz all the items related to the frequency or rpm set to 60 Hz or higher change to 50 Hz In contrast to this changing this setting from 50 Hz to 60 Hz causes all the function items set to 50 Hz to change to 60 Hz 5 26 Inverter Input Voltage Selection Set the inverter input power voltage The Low Voltage failure level changes automatically based on the voltage setting Code number Initial settings Group display Function display BAS 19 AC Input Volt S 220 V 5 27 Reading Writing and Saving Parameters Mode Fri Function display Setting display Unit CNF 46 Parameter Read 1 Yes CNF 47 Par
137. and set as 30 Hz Max frequency Max Freq setting DRV 20 400 Hz Aux speed A setting BAS 01 11 Expressed as an aux speed Hz or percentage depending on the conditions Aux speed gain G setting BAS 03 50 INO1 32 Factory default Assuming that 10 4 mA is input to I1 the frequency corresponding to 20 mA is 60 Hz Therefore aux speed A in the following table is 24 Hz 60 Hz x 10 4 mA 4 mA 20 mA 4 mA or 40 210096 x 10 4 mA 4 mA 20 mA 4 mA Setting type Final command frequency 0 M Hz G A Hz 30Hz M 50 G x 24Hz A 42 Hz 1 M Hz G A 30 Hz M x 50 G x 40 A 6 Hz 2 M Hz G A 30 Hz M 50 G x 40 A 150 Hz 3 M Hz M Hz G A 30 Hz M 30 Hz x 50 G x 40 A 36 Hz 30 Hz M 50 G x 2 x 40 A 50 x 60Hz 4 M Hz G 2 A 50 Hz vati 30 Hz M x 50 G x 2 x 40 A 50 3 Hz 5 MIHZT G 2 A 50 Reverse direction 30 Hz M 50 G x 2 x 60 40 300 Hz 6 MIHZJ G 2 A 50 Reverse direction 30 Hz M 30Hz M x 50 G x 2 x 40 A 50 27 Hz 7 M HZ M HZ G 2 A 50 Usage example 3 Main speed setting DRV 07 V1 If you set the frequency command as 30 Hz at 5 V Max Freq in Hz DRV 20 400 Hz Aux speed BAS 01 11 Expressed as an aux speed Hz or pe
138. and the signal is input to the terminal block set to Interlock 3 the auxiliary motors operate in the order of 1 2 and 4 The starting auxiliary motor selection for APO 21 occurs as follows 1 If the terminal signal is released the motors operate in the order of 1 2 3 and 4 If a signal is input to the Interlock 3 terminal during operation Auxiliary Motor 3 stops and Auxiliary Motor 4 starts If the interlock signal is released Auxiliary Motor 4 stops and Auxiliary Motor 3 resumes operation When the total number of motors is 4 and the auto change mode selection APO 35 is set to 2 Main they operate in the following manner If the starting auxiliary motor selected in APO 21 is 1 the inverter drives Motor 1 and the rest of the motors 2 3 and 4 operate as auxiliary motors then the motors operate in the manner described in Item 1 However if a fault occurs in Motor 1 which is connected to the inverter then the output is immediately blocked and Motor 2 connects to the inverter output If this occurs the auxiliary motors operate in the order of 3 and 4 When the interlock signal of Motor 1 is released they operate in the order of 3 4 and 1 LSis 535 5 Applied Functions M Bypass Operation Function Regul Bypass You can control the main motor speed using feedback rather than PID This controls the operation and stopping of the auxiliary motors based on the amount of feedback APO 34 Regul Bypass Specifies N
139. ar when the ratio of the output voltage to the input voltage is less than 100 so the output voltage has a linear relation to the input voltage CON34 SL2 OVM Perc sets the voltage range This range is limited by the overmodulation zone of Sensorless 2 The factory default setting of this code is 120 but you can specify a higher value for CON34 SL2 OVM Perc if you use a mechanical unit that operates with a very high level of reverse load torque limit lt load level or strikes and retracts like an impact load press etc to operate the inverter with load applied without causing a trip Moreover areas with poor input voltages primarily have lower input voltages than the nominal voltage so an OC1 trip occurs more frequently when you apply a very high reverse load torque limit lt load level such as an impact load This can also occur due to insufficient output voltages You can operate the inverter without a trip at very high loads by setting CON34 SL2 OVM Perc to as high as 140 150 CON 48 ACR P Gain CON49 ACR Gain Adjusts the P gain and gain of current PI controller DRV 10 Torque Control You can select which speed and torque control modes to use in Sensorless Il Vector control mode Set torque control DRV 10 to Yes to switch to operate the inverter in torque control mode For more details on torque control mode see section 5 14 Torque Control You can adjust the controller gain to meet the load characteristi
140. ariations in the inverter operation speed as shown in Fig 1 5 3 APP45 PID P2 Gain APP46 PID I2 Time APP22 PID P Gain APP23 PID I Time P I Gain Main PI Change Spd1 APP47 APP48 PI Change Spd2 speed Fig 1 5 3 Switching the PI gain depending on speed Code T Factory Group number Function Name default Range APP 22 PID P Gain PID controller 50 0 0 0 1000 0 proportional gain APP 23 PID I Time FID corro ler 1005 0 0 200 0 s integral time PID controller APP 45 PID P2 Gain prdporional gain2 100 0 0 0 1000 0 APP 46 PID i2 Time PID controller 2005 0 0 200 0 s integral time 2 Main speed to start 0 00 PI Change APP 47 PI Change Spat VAT SPEED 0 00 oe Main speed to APP 48 PIChange Spd2 complete gain 0 00 Pl Change Spd 100 00 switching LSis 223 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 24 5 Disturbance Compensation Code Factory Group number Fun Name default Range APP 86 W Noise Band Disturbance 0 0 0 0 100 0 detection band A Disturbance APP 87 WNOSeP compensation P 0 0 0 0 100 0 gain i Disturbance APP 88 aoe P compensation 0 0 sec 0 0 100 0 sec amp accel decel time If an error occurs in the position of the dancer or load cell with an abnormal band set at APP86 W Noise Band due to external causes you can use the P gain set in APP87 W Noise P Gain to effectively stabiliz
141. at least ten minutes after the power supply has been cut off Doing so may result in an electric shock DC 30 V or less Do not operate switches on the inverter with wet hands Doing so may result in an electric shock Do not use the inverter if the cable has been damaged Doing so may result in an electric shock Do not place heavy objects on the cable Placing heavy objects on the cable could damage its sheath and may result in an electric shock Do not install the product near any flammable materials Mounting the inverter on or near flammable materials may start a fire Switch off the power supply to a faulty inverter Failure to switch off the power supply to a faulty inverter may start a fire Do not touch the inverter while the power supply is on or within ten minutes of switching the power supply off Touching the inverter during this period may result in a burn due to the high operating temperatures of this product Do not supply power to a faulty inverter even after it has been installed Doing so may result in an electric shock Make sure that foreign substances such as screws metal water and oil do not enter the inverter Introducing foreign substances to the inverter may start a fire LSis v Usage Precautions Usage Precautions W Transportation and Installation Transport the product in a manner appropriate for its weight Install the product according to the procedure
142. c computation filter 0 Keypad 1 V1 2 11 3 v2 4 12 5 XV1 Selection of the APP 70 MinDia Source minimum bobbin 0 Keypad 6 XI diameter input 7 xv2 8 xl2 9 XV3 10 XI3 11 XV4 12 XI4 APP 75 MinDia Value Minimum bobbin Read Only iameter monitor APP 92 Max Main spa Mal speed 100 eo Hz 0 0 DRV20 Hz requency You can convert Eq 1 6 2 to percentages and reorganize it into Eq 1 6 3 Estimated diameter 96 Main speed 96 Current output frequency Hz APP 92 Max Main Spd x100 96 x APP 67 Min Diameter Eq 1 6 3 LSis 2 29 2 Winder Unwinder Operation The following description of the winder operating mechanism explains Eq 1 6 3 Unless you change the main speed it remains at the constant commanded and the actual diameter of the bobbin for the winder increases over time At the same time the tension on the dancer and load cell gradually increases Thus the Web PID controller produces a negative output and the current output frequency Hz of the inverter decreases Then by Eq 1 6 3 the estimated diameter increases This estimated diameter is internally restricted by the upper limit 10096 and lower limit APP67 Min Diameter By setting APP68 Diameter LPF you can use the time constant of the estimated diameter to control the computed speed at that diameter This estimated diameter
143. ce if you set the Pre PID Freq to 30 Hz then you can continue to carry out general operation at 30 Hz until the control volume PID feedback volume exceeds the value specified in APP 35 APP 35 Pre PID Exit APP36 Pre PID Delay You can start the PID control operation when the feedback volume control volume of the PID controller exceeds the value specified in APP 35 If the feedback volume is less than the value specified in APP 35 for the time period specified in APP 36 then a Pre PID Fail trip occurs and the power is cut off PA PID Reference PID Reference Feedback APP 35 Pre PID Exit lt 4 APP 34 Pre PID freq Output Frequency FX PID Operation Section 4 Area 1 t Area 2 LSis 523 5 Applied Functions 5 24 4 PID Sleep Mode APP 37 PID Sleep DT APP 38 PID Sleep Freq If the inverter operates at a frequency lower than the APP 38 Sleep Frequency for the time period set in APP 37 PID Sleep DT then the inverter stops operating and enters PID sleep mode For details about the criteria for switching to PID operation mode from PID Sleep mode refer to the APP 39 PID WakeUp Lev APP 39 PID WakeUp Lev APP40 PID WakeUp Mod Specifies the criteria for starting PID operation from PID sleep mode as previously explained If you select 0 Below Level in APP 40 you can restart PID operation when the feedback volume is less than the value specified in APP 39
144. ce versa Speed Search Operation Output frequency Operation command Inverter Line gt Inverter Common Inverter operation operation operation t 500 msec IN 65 75 Px Define Sets the No 15 Exchange and switches the motor from inverter power to commercial power Turn OFF the preset terminal to switch the motor from commercial power to the inverter output terminal OUT 30 Relay 1 OUT 32 MO1 Define Set the multi function relay or output to No 16 Inverter Line and No 17 Comm Line For details on the relay operation sequence refer to the following figure 560 LSis 5 Applied Functions 5 24 Cooling Fan Control Code Group number Function display Setting display Unit IN 65 75 Px Define 16 Exchange OUT 31 32 Relay1 2 17 Inverter Line OUT 33 Q1 Define 18 Comm Line Turn the fans insta this when the motor stops and starts frequently or in areas that mus led to cool the heat sink of the inverter body On or Off Use quiet This function helps extend the life of the cooling fan remain No 0 During Run only activated during operation Operates the cooling fan whenever power is applied to the inverter and an operation command is inputted The cooling fan stops when the operation command turns OFF or the inverter output is cut off If the heat sink temperature rises above a certain level the cooling fan is activated regardless of the operation comm
145. controller section In4 PID output the error change compensation frequency In1 and the diameter computed in the diameter computation section In2 Diameter PID Output Method Fixedinon fixed PID controller Group Code Function Name Factory default Range number 0 No APP 54 Fixed PID En Fed PD controller 0 No 1 Yes Minimum value of APP 55 Min Fixed PID the fixed PID 10 0 0 0 50 0 controller Note 1 This code appears when No is selected in APP54 Fixed PID En When you select Yes in APP54 Fixed PID En the PID output an output of the Web PID controller as shown in Eq 1 7 1 remains constant regardless of he main speed Final PIDoutput PIDoutput Eg 1 7 1 When you select No as the factory default for APP54 Fixed PID En the PID output an output of the Web PID controller as shown in Eq 1 7 2 is proportional to the main speed In other words it means that the ratio of the PID output to the main speed remains constant According to this principle lower main speeds produce less PID output whereas higher main speeds produce higher PID output Final PID output 96 Main speed command PID output 96 x 100 0 Eq 1 7 2 However when you select No as the factory default in APP54 Fixed PID En and receive a command to lower the main speed below the value specified
146. cs However the motor may overheat or the system may become unstable due to the controller gain settings Adjusting the various gains in Sensorless Il Vector control mode The motor and load characteristics greatly affect Sensorless Il Vector control so you need to adjust the gains of the controller to suit the application Suppose that Sensorless Il Vector control operates in speed mode DRV 10 torque control is set to 0 No First if the inverter operates unstably at extremely low speeds below 2 3 Hz or speed shakes occur at startup double the factory default setting of CON 22 ASR SL Gain1 and adjust the gain value to the proper level Secondly sites that primarily use a regenerative load may produce torque ripples in the motor when the regenerative load is applied If this occurs reduce CON 21 ASR SL P Gain1 to as low as 50 of the factory default setting and adjust the gain value to the proper level If the torque ripple does not disappear restore CON 21 ASR SL P Gain1 to its factory default settings and reduce CON 30 S Est Gain 1 to as much as 50 of its factory default setting and adjust the gain value to the proper level LSis 59 5 Applied Functions 5 13 Vector Control 5 38 Install the encoder option card in the inverter body and operate the motor at a highly accurate speed and in a vector control mode where you can control t
147. d in DRV06 Cmd Source the parameters related to the main speed command in APPOS 14 and the PID controller in APP15 57 or any other additional functions web brake detection emergency stop bypass reverse crawling etc if necessary Warranty Warranty Product Name AC Variable Speed Drive Date of Installation Model Name Web Control Manual Warranty Period Name Customer Address Phone Number Name Sales Agency Address Phone Number Notes However the warranty period may vary according to the terms of the contract This inverter has been manufactured by LSIS using strict quality control and inspection processes The warranty period is 18 months from the date of installation A period of 18 months from the date of manufacture will be applied if the date of installation has not been entered Free after sales servicing If the drive fails as a result of normal usage during the warranty period contact our agency or designated service center We will repair the drive free of charge Paid Servicing In the following instances repair services are provided for a fee If the damage is the result of deliberate action or negligence If the damage is the result of power supply problems or an improper connecting device If the damage is the result of a natural disaster for example fire flood gas earthquake etc If the inverter has bee
148. do not use a Web PID so they measure the friction loss ona roll before system operation and compensate for it during the tension control operation You can set and measure the friction loss in section 20 Auto Tuning of the BAS group 244 LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation Code Factory Group number Function Name default Range n 7 Friction BAS 20 Auto Tuning Auto tuning Loss A A Friction loss 6 Hz 12 E BAS Sole d een Spd measurement Hz 60 pou in frequency Hz 3 BAS jane puecomp Trat Friction loss value 0 00 0 00 100 0 Note 1 This code appears when you select Tension Ctrl in APPO1 App Mode APP20 Auto Tuning In order to measure friction loss you must select Friction Loss when mounting an empty bobbin without connecting any material to the corresponding roll When you select a function the system immediately starts to measure the friction loss The system measures friction loss after operating at acceleration and at constant speed for the 10 constant speed zones specified in APP80 to APP98 After the system measures the friction loss the motor executes a free run stop The values measured in each zone are stored in APP81 99 after the system finishes auto tuning General auto tuning All does not include friction loss measurements APP80 98 FricComp Spd 1 10 Specifies the friction loss measurement speed The default value for the 10 zones is 60
149. e Reference page Multi 81 Ohi61F Relay funcion 0 NONE 28 Trip o o o o o o relay 1 item Multi 32 0h1620 Relay2 funcion 1 FDT 1 13 Run o o o o o o relay 2 item Multi function 33 0h1621 Q1 Define oe 2 FDr2 o FOTH o o o o o o item k Multi te s Shi 0h1622 Q2Defing function 5 FDT 3 0 FDT 2 o o o o oj o output 2 item Multi 35 0h1623 G3 Define function 4 FDT4 0 FDT 3 o o o o o o output 3 item Multi 36 0h1624 Q4 Define foncion 5 overload 0 FDT 4 o o o o o o output 4 item 6 IOL 7 Under Load 8 FanLock 9 Stall 10 Over Voltage 11 Low Voltage LSIs 627 6 Table of Functions 12 Over Heat 8 command 14 Run 15 Stop 16 Steady 17 Inverter Line 18 Comm Line 9 Sanch 20 Step Pulse 5 72 21 Sea Pulse 5 72 22 Ready 28 TivAcc i 24 _ Trv Dec 5 81 25 MMC 26 Zspd Dect 7 27 Torque Dect 5 45 5 71 28 Timer Out 29 Trip 30 Lost Keypad 4 WamncED 32 ENC Tune 33 ENC Dir 94 Control 579 35 BR Control 5 76 36 Web Break 37 Web Break m Web Break Input Terminal Block Function Group PAR gt OUT Control mode Communication Function Reference 5 Setting range
150. e Indicates the D gain of the PID controller If the D gain is 10 ms and the error change is 100 then it takes 10 ms for the D controller output to decrease from 100 to 34 APP27 PID Out LPF Sets the delay time constant of the PID controller output In general this code sets the delay time to 0 ms to shorten the response time of the PID controller However a higher value makes the PID controller less responsive but more stable APP31 PID Out Inv Selects whether to invert the output of the PID controller Select Yes to invert the PID output code before it is output APP32 PID Out Scale Adjusts the scale of the PID controller output First suppose that the PID controller is saturated In such a situation if this code is set to 100 the PID controller output is 100 When this code is set to 30 the PID controller output is 3096 APP50 PI Gain Ramp This code is the ramp time applicable when P I gain Switching occurs due to a change in the multi function input Ext PI Gain2 during inverter operation In addition to this this code also applies when you use the loader to change the P I gain during inverter operation Ramp time switching is based on 1000 for the P gain and 200 sec for the gain For example it takes 3 sec 30 100 1000 to change the P gain from 100 to 200 when APP50 PI Gain Ramp is set to 30 sec 410 LSis 4 Other Functions P I gain selected Off APP22 PID P Gain APP23
151. e macro but you can change the data in the macro group For details on the Traverse function please see Chapter 8 Section 8 1 37 Traverse Operation The Draw function is a type of open loop tension control It uses the speed difference between the motors for the main speed command rate to maintain the tension of the materials between the motors For more details refer to section 8 1 1 Setting the Override Frequency Using the Aux Frequency Command 568 LSis 5 Applied Functions 5 32 Easy Start Mode Code number Function display Initial settings display Unit CNF 61 Easy Start On 1 Yes CNF 61 Easy Start On Set this code to Yes and select All in CNF 40 Parameter Init to initialize all of the inverter parameters Easy Start begins working when you turn the inverter Off and then On M Starting Easy Start 1 Set CNF 61 Easy Start On to Yes 2 Select All in CNF 40 Parameter Init to initialize all of the inverter parameters Easy Start starts when the inverter power is turned off on the first time If the parameters appear on the digital loader in the following sequence set them using the appropriate values Press the ESC key on the digital loader to immediately exit Easy Start Start Easy Set Select Yes CNF 01 Language Sel Select the desired language DRV 14 Motor Capacity Specify the capacity of the motor 3 BAS 11 Pole Number Specify the number of motor poles
152. e mechanical information about the winder from Table A1 1 to enter the APP92 Max Main Spd setting The APP92 Max Main Spd setting determines the maximum rotation speed of the motor Hz or RPM at the minimum diameter and maximum linear speed Use the following formula to calculate the APP92 setting 600 mpm 0 4 m x z 4 pole APP 92 Max Main Spd x 4 I Beltratio x 65 29 Hz Release the DRV20 Max Freq limit to set the APP92 Max Main Spd setting To account for the frequency added from the PID controller enter approx 1 2 times the APP92 Max Main Spd to the DRV20 Max Freq Now enter the bobbin diameter The following formula uses the minimum diameter of 0 4 m and the maximum diameter of 0 9 m from Fig A1 1 to calculate the ratio of the maximum diameter to the min diameter as a percentage ar 3 0 4 m Minimum Diameter x 100 44 4 0 9 m Enter the calculated 44 4 as the APP63 Bobbin 1 Diameter and the APP67 Min Diameter settings Be sure to reset the bobbin diameter when replacing a bobbin To do this you must assign a function that resets the bobbin diameter to one of the multi function inputs Select an IN code between IN65 72 P Define and then set it to 52 Web Preset Finally set the operation command method in DRV06 Cmd Source the parameters related to the main speed command in APP03 14 codes and the PID controller in APP15 57 codes or any other additio
153. e the dancer or load cell The APP88 W Noise P Ramp code sets the time constant for disturbance compensation LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 6 Diameter Computation Section MinDia Source MinDia pad Min Value eer EOD piameter urrent output 2 1 requency Hz od Main speed X e 5 Current output frequency Hz i X APP67 Min Diameter 4 Nain speed 4 iepaz ax wain Spa Hz 10 CER Max Main Web Bobbin L H Diameter Spd Y Dianeter Min Diameter Ptze8 LPF Input Bobbint Diamtr E eH Lus Bobbin2 Diamtr J LPF Bobbin3 Diamtr J Bobbin4 Diamtr Dianeter Min Preset Value Diameter Web Preset P1 P8 Curr Bobbin Y Diameter Web output Preset E Web Splice P1 P8 Big 4 Hold Dia D s Mode No 4 lt 0 Min Main Spd p P LD ix aL Curr Web Hold P1 P8 Diameter ue Web Quick Stop P1 P8 JOG FWD REV JOG P1 P8 Web Dis PID P1 P8 UU re Web PID En Yes Web Break In a tension control system the winder unwinder flux motor speed and diameter are correlated as shown in Eq 1 6 1 Flux mpm Motor speed rpm x diameter xz m Constant Eq 1 6 1 Let s take a look at one example of a winder in a closed loop tension control system Unle
154. eb Main Speed 0 1 96 Main speed command 0h0397 hass Reserved 0h039A Anytime Para Sets the CNF 20 value 0h039B Monitor Line 1 Sets the CNF 21 value 0h039C Monitor Line 2 Sets the CNF 22 value 0h039D Monitor Line 3 Sets the CNF 23 value LSis 79 7 iS7 Communication Common Areas 7 3 Monitoring Communicat Common Areas for iS7 Dedicated Product Address Parameter Scale U Assigned content by 0h0D00 Input of expansion I O 2 V1 0 01 96 Input of expansion l O 2 voltage V1 OhODO1 Input of expansion O V2 0 01 96 Input of expansion l O 2 voltage V2 0h0D02 Input of expansion I O 2 V3 0 01 96 Input of expansion l O 2 voltage V3 Oh0D03 Input of expansion I O 2 V4 0 01 __ Input of expansion l O 2 voltage V4 0h0D04 Reserved l 0h0D05 Input of expansion VO 2 I1 0 01 Inputof expansion O 2 current 11 0h0D06 Input of expansion I O 212 0 01 Input of expansion 1 O 2 current I2 0h0D07 Input of expansion I O 2 13 0 01 96 Input of expansion O 2 current 13 0h0D08 Input of expansion I O 2 14 0 01 Input of expansion O 2 current 14 0h0D09 Reserved l OhODOA Expansion VO 2 AO1 0 01 Expansion l O 2 analog output 1 AO1 OhODOB Expansion l O 2 AO2 0 01 9 amp Expansion l O 2 analog output 2 AO2 ohoDoc Expansion l O 2 AO3 0 01 96 Expansion l O 2 anal
155. eb material loosens on an open loop unwinder without a tension control detector such as a dancer or load cell you must gradually increase the stall level using the analog input to restore the tension However this method does not allow for precise tension control Code Factory Group number Function Name default Range 0 Keypad 1 Vi Stall level setting 2 4 PRT 48 Stall Src Sel 0 Keypad method 3 v2 4 l2 5 Pulse PRT 49 Stall Disp Current stall level Read Only PRT 50 Stall Prevent Stall mode 000 000 111 selection PRT 52 Stall Level 1 Stall level 1 18096 30 250 Note 1 PRT49 Stall Disp is enabled when PRT48 Stall Src Sel is not 0 Keypad PRT48 Stall Src Sel Allows you to select how to set the stall level If you select 0 Keypad you can use a multi step stall level for PRT51 58 n most cases the open loop unwinder uses an analog input to set this code and changes the analog input to control the stall level during inverter operation and ultimately maintain the back tension PRT50 Stall Prevent Determines whether to use the stall function An open oop unwinder only uses the stall function during acceleration and at constant speeds so it sets this code to 011 PRT52 Stall Level 1 This stall level enters the maximum value voltage 10 V current 20 mA for the analog input For example suppose that PRT52 Stall Level 1 is set to 150 and PRT48 St
156. ectors such as the dancer or load cell and activates the PID controller to maintain a constant tension The characteristics of the PID controller in closed loop tension control systems differ from existing PID controllers That is why this system is referred to as a Web PID Controller in this manual JR Direction of movement Capstan 3 Capstan 2 Capstan 1 Tension detector 4 20 mA Tension detector 4 20mA Tension Tension detector detector 4 4 20 mA Winder Length 25 cm Length 100 cm Fig 2 1 1 Capstan operating mechanisms As shown in Fig 2 1 1 thinner web materials in a continuous process require quicker capstan rotations Because web materials must not bias upward or deflect downward to assure continuous processing the capstan must handle different thicknesses and lengths of web materials within the same amount of time Web material thicknesses and lengths vary depending on the process but supposing that each process does not lose web materials the volume of the web materials remains constant Thus the thickness 2 mm of the web materia handled by Capstan 1 is 1 4 times more than that 8 mm of the web material handled by Capstan 2 so the length 100 cm of the web material handled by Capstan 1 is 4 times more than the length 25 cm of the web material handled by Capstan 2 Therefore the rotation speed of Capstan 1 must be 4 times faster LSis 31
157. emergency stop related code APP82 e Detects potential ruptures in the web material in advance related code APP76 80 In order to use the capstan in the iS7 system you must apply the following settings Group Pater Function Name Setting APP 01 App Mode Application selection 5 Tension Ctrl APP 02 Tnsn Ctrl Mode Tension control operation 2 Capstan mode selection LSis 3 Capstan Operation 3 2 General Configuration Int Int Nain speed Qut Ine Ine command part Materials thickness i out computation part m Final speed ini m computation part ua Qut Int Web break tutt detection part Int In Analogue Outi output part Out Web PID Control ler part ini Out 3 The following table outlines the inputs and outputs for each section Functional section Inpi Output Main speed command 5 Out1 Main speed section Error change compensation Web PID Quti frequency Hz Controller Int Diameter Section Out2 PID output Out3 PID feedback 96 Material In1 Current output frequency Hz thickness ing Main speed 76 Outt Thickness computation section In3 Web break event 0 1 Int Error change compensation Final speed frequency Hz Out Final speed command Hz computation In2 Diameter section In3 Main speed Out2 Main speed PID In4 PID output Analog output Int Main speed PID section In2 Main speed
158. en APP 01 App Mode is set to Tension Ctrl Note 33 APP 04 only appears when APP 05 Main Spd Src is set to Keypad Note 34 APP 07 and 14 only appear when APPO6 Main XcelT En is set to Yes Note 41 It only appears when the APP 02 Tnsn Ctrl Mode is set to W_Spd Close W Tens Close UW Tens Close and Capstan Application Function Group PAR 9 APP Communication address Function display Setting range UW Spd Close Control 0 Keypad 1 ow 2 n PID S ek 2 12 4 8 PID reference Key 12 4 8 20 Oh1814 4 4 2 x o o o x x Ref Source selection pad Bia 5 Int485 6 Encoder 7 FieldBus 8 PLC o vi 1 n 2 v2 Now 3 2 17 2h 0h1815 PD FID Teedbaex SH x 21748 lclo o x x F B Source selection 4 Int485 5 18 5 Encoder 6 FieldBus 7 mc poe PID controller in 0h1816 PID P Gain proportional 0 1000 50 0 o 217 o o o x x gain ro Km 0h1817 PID I Time PID controller o 5050 se 10 0 o 217 o o o x x integral time pav PID controller n Oh1818 PID D Time differentiation 0 1000 msec 0 o 217 o o olx x time 25 0h1819 PID F Gain Tension scale 0 1000 0 100 0 o 241 x x o x x s a Oh181B PID OUt PID output fiter 0 10000ms 0 o 217 o o o x x s Km Oht81C PII Limit PIP eontrolier g_ 100 100 0 o 217 o o o
159. ent During abnormal inverter operation multi function input Web Bypass turns ON he inverter stops operating or it trips multiply the main speed by APP83 Bypass Gain and export the results to the analog output AO1 0 10 V voltage AO2 0 20 mA current The PID output is not available in speed control mode of an open loop system so you can only export the main speed as an analog output 240 LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 9 Final Tension Computation Section PID F Gain Tension command PID Out Final torque x SS command o Web Tension D ter iameter Open loop Mode Diameter No Select Min Diameter M O Friction loss Final tension computation is available in tension control closed loop open loop systems Closed loop tension systems can use the tension command Web PID output and diameter values to output the final torque command Open loop tension systems do not use the Web PID output so it uses the tension command diameter and friction loss values to output the final torque command Code number Factory Group default Range Function Name APP 25 PID F Gain Tension scale 100 0 0 0 1000 0 APP25 PID F Gain This gain controls the scale of the tension command value output from the tension command section In a closed loop tension system you can set this code to
160. equation in Eq 3 3 3 the inverter prevents the output of the Web PID controller from decreasing the low main speed command to below the value specified in APP55 Min Fixed PID APP55 Min Fixed PID 96 Final PID output 46 PID output 96 x 100 0155 Eq 3 3 3 Table 3 3 1 shows the final PID output 96 based on the APP55 Fixed PID En value if APP32 PID Out Scale is set to 20 and APP55 Min Fixed PID to the factory default setting of 1096 This table assumes that the PID output is now saturated at 20 Note 3 3 2 of Table 3 3 1 shows that the main speed is 2 or 8 below the factory default setting of APP55 Min Fixed PID i e 1096 so you can determine it using Eq 3 3 3 Note 3 3 2 shows that the main speed is 20 or 80 over the factory default setting of APP55 Min Fixed PID i e 1096 so you can determine it using Eq 3 3 2 412 LSis 4 Other Functions Table 3 3 1 Comparison of PID outputs by PID controller types APP54 Fixed PID APP54 Fixed PID E APP54 Fixed PID En PID output if Yes PID output if No 2 0 20 0 2 00935 8 0 20 0 208 20 0 20 0 apnea 80 0 20 0 1600439 APP98 PID Sample T Changes the execution freguency of the Ext PID Controller 4 Speed Controller P Gain Profile Inertia Compensation The winder develops a larger diameter and produces more inertia over time so it requires positive inertia compensation In contrast to th
161. er Full Diameter P Profile Square n A n Diameter Diameter Diameter gt gt gt 4 A P gain P gain P gain Kp Kp Kp gt gt gt Fig 1 5 2 The P gain varies depending on the CON90 ASR P Pro Mode setting LSis 4 Other Functions LSis 4 15 5 Applied Functions 5 5 1 Applied Functions Setting the Override Frequency Using the Aux Frequency Command If you want to set the requency for various computing conditions using the main and auxiliary speeds as for a Draw operation Code 3 5 Group number Function display Functional settings Range Unit DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 0 Keypad 1 0 9 BAS 01 AUX Ref Src 1 V1 0 4 BAS 02 AUX Calc Type 0 M G A 0 7 BAS 03 AUX Ref Gain 0 0 200 200 IN 65 75 Px Define 40 Dis Aux Ref 0 48 You can use two frequency setting methods at the same time to set the operation You can use the main speed to set al frequency he main operational frequency and you can use the aux speed setting to fine tune the main operation For example assume you introd hat the settings were made as in the preceding table If uce a 10 to 10 V voltage to the V1 terminal with a gain setting of 5 variables from IN 01 to LN 16 are the initial values and the IN 06 V1 polarity is set to Bipolar while using Keypad 1 as the main speed and operating the inverter al 30 00 Hz you can fine tune inver
162. es Web Dis PID P1 P8 011 Web Splice P1 P8 011 Ol oF 4 Term Clear P1 PB Off 100 ox PID Out Inv PID Output LPF Tension commandl A E None Linear a PIDLo PIDOut PIDOut PID Start PID F B S B Source Lmt LPF Scale Ramp PID F B Val Profile P Mode 4 None Int 485 Doer None P Gain adaptation P Gain at Core Size Diameter Core Size Full Diameter Full Diameter zehn PID P I Gain Full Diamete Full Diameter PID P2 12 Gain Diameter Profile P Web PI Gain2 Gain P1 P8 PI Change Spdt 2 PID Feedback In a closed loop tension control system the analog quantity feedback from tension detectors such as the dancer or load cell determine the PID controller output A PID controller optimized for tension control systems is referred to as a Web PID controller The Web PID controller also features the following major additional functions 1 Improves the initial transient phenomenon of the dancer or load cell by increasing the PID output when the inverter starts during ramp up APP51 PID Start Ramp 2 Compensates for inertia by using the diameter 96 estimated for that section in the diameter computation to change the P gain of the PID controller APP56 Profile P Mode APP57 Profile P Gain and 3 Compensates for any disturbances APP86 88 that may occur during operation APP86 88 216 LSIs 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 1 PID C
163. es the saved fault history CNF 60 Add Title Del When you upgrade the software version of inverter body and add new codes you can use this function to display any codes added to the previous version of the keypad and activate any extra functions Set this code to Yes and remove the keypad from the inverter body and insert it again to update the digital keypad title CNF 62 WH Count Reset Clears accumulated power consumption CNF 74 Fan Time CNF75 Fan Time Rst Indicates the cumulative time of cooling fan operation Select Yes in CNF 75 Fan Time Rst to clear CNF 74 Fan Time 570 LSis 5 Applied Functions 5 34 Timer Function Group Codenumber Function display Initial settings display IN 65 75 Px Define 38 Timer In OUT 31 33 Relay1 2 Q1 27 Timer Out OUT 55 TimerOn Delay 3 00 Sec OUT 56 TimerOff Delay 5 1 00 Sec This is the timer function for the multi function input terminal You can turn the multi function output including relay On or Off using the timer N 65 75 Px Define Sets the terminal for the timer from the multi function input terminals to the No 38 Timer In When you input the set terminal the output set to the Timer Out activates after the time period set in OUT 55 TimerOn Delay has elapsed When the multi function input terminal is OFF the multi function output or relay turns OFF after the time period set in OUT 56 TimerOff Delay has elapsed Out 56 Px
164. favor rapid tension response characteristics However you must set this code to default i e 100 0 in open loop tension systems LSis 2 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 10 Web Break Detection Section P Output Torauel Web Brk Lev Hi Closed loop Mode Select ID Feedback Web Open Torque Limit Final torque command Web Brk En Warning or Trip LEV H Closed Loop In lt LEVL or Spd Open Loop In lt Web Open Torque Limit LEVL Tens Open Loop In lt final tor LEV L In gt LEV H o a Web Break que command LEV Web Brk Lev Lo Web Brk Dly Inverter operation command Web Brk St Dly 2 42 Closed loop tension control systems use tension de or load cell When the feedback from the tension de than the time specified the inverter determines that the web material may be ruptured It then informs the upper level controller of the potential risk via the multi function output contact and initiates the proper protective operation based on this setting ectors such as the dancer ector is shorter or longer Open loop tension control systems do not use tension detectors Instead they use the torque output value to determine web material ruptures In a speed control open loop tension system web break detection occurs when the torque output drops
165. gins to decelerate If this signal is OFF the inverter stops decelerating and operates at a constant speed If both the UP and DOWN signals are ON at the same time both acceleration and deceleration stop LSis 59 5 Applied Functions Frequency Memorized frequenc Start frequency P6 CLEAR 8 0 Operation command FX 510 LSis 5 Applied Functions 5 4 Wire Operation Operating the Inverter with the Push Button or Equivalent Code Group BAT Function display Function settings Range Unit DRV 06 Cmd Source 1 Fx Rx 1 0 5 IN 65 75 Px Define 14 3 Wire 0 48 Px P1 P8 P9 P11 option This refers to a function that latches the input signals and carries out the operation shown in the following figure Therefore you can use the Push button switch to configure a simple sequence circuit as shown in the following figure The minimum input time t for the input terminal should be 1 msec or longer to properly operate the inverter The inverter stops operating if forward and reverse operation commands are input at the same time O 0 R SE FX IN 65 Nine NI LSis 5 11 5 Applied Functions 5 5 Safe Operation Mode Using the Terminal Input to Limit Operation Code Function number CIE EN ADV 70 Run En Mode 1 DI Dependent ADV 71 Run Dis Stop 0 Free Run 0
166. he controller is limited to the upper and lower value specified in this code isis 4 Other Functions APP54 Fixed PID En APP55 Min Fixed PID Code Factory Group number Function Na default Range 0 No APP 54 Fixed Pip En Fixed PID controller No selection 1 Yes Minimum value of APP 55 Min Fixed PID the fixed PID 10 096 0 0 50 096 controller When you select Yes for APP54 Fixed PID En the PID output an output of the Ext PID controller as shown in Eq 3 3 1 remains constant regardless of he main speed Final PIDoutput PID output 96 Eq 3 3 1 When you select No as the factory default setting for APP54 Fixed PID En he PID output an output of the Ext PID controller as shown in Eq 3 3 2 is proportional to the main speed In other words it means that the ratio of the PID output 96 to the main speed remains constant According to this principle lower main speeds produce less PID output whereas higher main speeds produce more PID output 96 Main speed command 96 100 0 Eq 3 3 2 Final PID output 96 PID output 96 x However when you select No as the factory default for APP54 Fixed PID En and receive a command to lower the main speed below the value specified in APP55 Min Fixed PID the inverter functions according to the equation shown in Eq 3 3 3 By functioning according to the
167. he orque Bones Function display Initial settings display DRV 09 Control Mode 4 Vector 5 DRV 21 Hz rpm Sel 1 Rpm Display BAS 20 Auto Tuning 1 Yes CON 09 PreExTime 3 1 0 Sec CON 10 Flux Force a 100 0 CON 11 Hold Time amp 1 0 Sec CON 12 ASR P Gain 1 50 0 CON 13 ASR Gain 1 2 300 msec CON 15 ASR P Gain 2 50 0 96 CON 16 ASR I Gain 2 300 msec CON 18 Gain Sw Freq E 0 00 Hz CON 19 Gain Sw Delay 0 10 Sec CON 51 ASR Ref LPF lt 0 msec CON 52 Torgue Out LPF E 0 msec CON 53 Torque Lmt Src 0 Keypad 1 CON 54 FWD Trg Lmt 180 96 CON 55 FWD Trq Lmt lt 180 CON 56 REV Trg Lmt x 180 CON 57 REV Trq Lmt 180 96 CON 58 Trq Bias Src 0 Keypad 1 E CON 59 Torque Bias B 0 0 96 CON 60 Trq BiasFF E 0 0 96 IN 65 75 Px Define 36 Asr Gain 2 IN 65 75 Px Define 37 ASR P PI LSis 5 Applied Functions 1 Items to Check Before Operation 2 For high performance operation in vector control mode you must input the correct data for the related functions such as the motor parameter measurements and the encoder Perform the following setting procedure before starting operation in vector control mode The inverter and motor must have the same capacity to achieve high performance in vector control mode A motor with a capacity that is two or more levels smaller than the inverter capacity could adversely affect the control characteristics If this is the case change the control mode to V F c
168. he CNF 53 Key Lock PW appears again once the password is registered CNF 52 Key Lock Set If you enter the registered password with the prohibit change function disabled Locked appears and you cannot switch to the Editor mode even if you press the PROG key in the function code you want to edit If you enter the password again the Unlocked icon disappears and the prohibit change function is disabled When the hide parameter group function is active you cannot change the functions related to inverter operation Therefore be sure to remember the registered password Displaying the Changed Parameters Function Code s m m Mode number Function display Initial settings display 0 View All CNF 41 Changed Para 1 View Changed This function only shows the parameters that differ from the factory default settings Use it to track modified parameters LSis 565 5 Applied Functions Select No1 View Changed to only display the changed parameters Select No 0 View All to display all of the existing parameters 5 30 Add User Group USR Grp 5 66 Code f i number Function display CNF 42 Multi Key Sel 3 UserGrp SelKey CNF 45 UserGrp AllDel 0 No You can put together only the selected parameters from the data available for the groups in the parameter mode to carry out data modification You can register up 0 64 parameters for each user group CNF 42 Multi Key Sel
169. he number of output pulses for each revolution APO 08 Enc Monitor Converts the encoder output into motor revolutions and represent it in Hz or rpm BAS 20 Auto Tuning Select the encoder related options and set 3 Enc Test in auto tuning to operate the inverter up to 20 Hz in the forward direction Operate the inverter in the forward direction and then decelerate it before accelerating it up to 20 Hz in the reverse direction If the encoder functions properly the auto tuning item changes to None The Enc reversed icon appears when there is a fault in the encoder wiring If this occurs change the APO 05 Enc Pulse Sel setting or reverse two of the inverter output wires connected to the motor 530 LSis 5 Applied Functions 5 10 VIF Operation Using the Speed Sensor controller Ensure that t inverter DRV 09 Control Mode Selects the control mode for the 2 V F PG 0 V F Function display aon ee DRV 09 Control Mode VIF PG 0 5 CON 45 PG P Gain 3000 0 9999 CON 46 PG I Gain 50 0 9999 CON 47 PG Slip Max 100 0 200 APO 01 Enc Opt Mode Feedback 0 2 nstall an encoder option card to improve the speed control precision of the V F he encoder is properly connected before operating the control mode adds speed control to inverter operation The reference for the speed controller becomes the set freguency and the feedback becomes an encoder input CON 45 PG P Gain CON 46
170. her item to set V1 to Ref Source Setting type Function PID F B Source Availability Inputs the PID reference from the p Keypad inverter keypad x 1 vi The 10 10 V voltage input terminal o of terminal block 2 n The 0 20 mA current input terminal o LSis 5 5 Applied Functions Setting type Function PID F B Source Availability of terminal block The voltage input terminal of the Ext 3 ve V O option card g 4 12 The current input terminal of the Ext o V O option card The RS485 input terminal of the gt Indas terminal block i The pulse input of the encoder 6 Encoder option card O The communication command from V re l vis the communication option card 9 8 PLC The command from the PLC option o card The command from the synchronous 2 SHO operation option card 9 10 Binary Type Morro from the BCD option x You can display the PID reference in monitor mode and APP 17 You can monitor it using the item defined as No 17 PID Ref Value in CNF 06 08 under Config Mode CNF APP 21 PID F B Source Selects the feedback input in PID control You can select any reference input type except keypad input Keypad 1 Keypad 2 You cannot set the feedback with the same input as the reference input For instance if you select the No 1 V1 terminal as the APP 20 Ref Source then you cannot select V1 as the APP 21 PID F B Source You can monitor the feedback flow
171. ion input terminal causes the system to operate with the 100 Trv Amp frequency 100 TrvScramb 100 frequency pattern increased by the value specified in APP 12 APP 13 Trv Offset Lo Selecting and entering the No 27 Trv Offset Lo functions in the multi function input terminal causes the system to operate with the Trv OffsetHi frequency Operation frequency TrvOffsetH 100 frequency pattern decreased by the value specified in APP 13 LSis 575 5 Applied Functions Operation frequency Trv Offsetlo 100 Trv OffsetLo frequency 5 37 Brake Control Function display Setting display Setting range DRV 09 Control Mode 0 VIF ADV 41 BR Rls Curr 50 0 0 180 96 ADV 42 BR RIs Dly 1 00 0 10 0 Sec ADV 44 BRRisFwdFr 1 00 Qs Maximum Hz frequency 0 Maximum ADV 45 BR RIs Rev Fr 1 00 frequency Hz ADV 46 BR Eng Dly 1 00 0 10 Sec ADV 47 BR Eng Fr E 2 00 breui Hz requency OUT 31 33 Relay x or Q1 35 BR Control This controls the on off operation of the brake in a load system that uses an electronic brake The activation sequence differs depending on the control mode DRV 09 settings Please check the control mode before configuring the Sequence If the brake control is working the DC brake at start ADV 12 and dwell operation ADV 20 23 do not operate If the torque control DRV 10 is set brake control does not work M Non vector Co
172. is the unwinder develops a smaller diameter and produces less inertia over time so it requires negative inertia compensation This inertia compensation is applied to the P gain of the Web PID in section 1 5 Web PID Controller Section For more effective inertia compensation you can increase the ASR P gain with a larger diameter The formulas and figures for inertia compensation are identical to those used for inertia compensation with the P gain of the Web PID Fig 3 4 1 shows how the P gain trends and formulas vary depending on the diameter Code Factory Group number Function Name default Range 0 None CON gotten ASR P Pro ASR P Gain 0 Non 1 T Mode profile selection 2 Square CON gie ASRE PIO ASR profile gain 1 00 0 01 10 00 Note 1 This code only appears when you set APP 02 Tnsn Ctrl Mode to W_Spd Close UW_Spd Close W Spd Open or UW_Spd Open Note 2 This code only appears when CON 90 ASR P Pro Mode is set to Linear or Square None ji compensation P Gain P Gain Linear 3 Diameter Bobbin Diameter Inetia compensation P Gain P Gain x V Profile P Gain APP57 x I Full Diameter Full Diameter LSis 413 4 Other Functions 4 14 Square Inetia compensation P Gain P Gain x P Profile None f Profile P Gain x P Profile Linear Diameter Full Diameter Bobbin Diamet
173. ith capacities below 3 7 kW come equipped with a built in braking resistor LSis 1 1 1 Precautions 1 2 Products with a Built in Braking Resistor capacity less than 3 7 kW If you want a high frequency braking resistor please use a separate braking resistor 100 braking torque Applicable inverter Usage 2 ED Voltage capacity ED Continuous kW operation Resistance Q 0 75 2 5 sec 200 100 200 V 15 2 1 5 sec 100 100 product 22 2 5 sec 60 100 3 7 2 1 5 sec 40 100 0 75 2 1 5 sec 900 100 400 V 15 2 1 5 sec 450 100 product 22 2 5 sec 300 100 37 2 1 5 sec 200 100 If you use a product with a built in braking resistor capacity less than 3 7 kW make sure that PRT67 DB RES SEL is set to Inside and PRT66 DB Warn ED is set to 1 or 2 percent If DB Warn ED is 0 it means that there is no limit on the use of the braking resistor Continuously using the braking resistor in an environment that requires frequent braking may burn out the braking resistor Moreover for products with a built in braking resistor DB Warn ED can be set to 2 to limit capacity and protect the braking resistor For environments that require frequent braking please select a product without a built in braking resistor and use a separate braking resistor 296 usage means that if the braking operation conditions are sustained for 100 seconds braking is activated fo
174. kness 1 PID Output Method Fixedinon fixed PID controller This is the same as section 1 6 1 PID output method Fixed non fixed PID controller See section 1 6 2 Final Speed Hz Computation In Fig 2 8 1 U1 is equal to the main speed command PID output and is converted into Hz as shown in Eq 2 8 1 Main speed PIDoutput Hz Main speed PIDoutput 96 x APP 92 Max Main Spd Hz Eq 2 8 1 100 0 ed He 20M Now you can convert Eq 2 7 1 of section 2 7 into Eq 2 8 2 The 10096 multiplied on the right side of Eq 2 8 2 is the reference thickness of the web material This value is fixed Eq 2 8 2 allows you to compute the final speed Hz of the inverter Final speed Hz Main speed PIDoutput Hz Estimated thickness of materials 96 x 100 Eq 2 82 Code Group number default Function Factory Range The compensation rate reflected by the APP 89 Compen Xcel computation of the 20 0 100 material thickness at the final speed APP89 Compen Xcel As shown in Eq 2 8 2 the final output frequency of he inverter depends on the estimated material thickness Here you can set he rate and response speed where the variations in the output frequency induced by the estimated material thickness would otherwise be reflected in he actual output frequency of the inverter The lower value of APP89 Compen Xcel values c a 5
175. ler at moderate or high speeds ca 1 2 of base frequency when controlling the Sensorless II Vector LSis 535 5 Applied Functions 5 36 2 3 You can set CON 23 ASR SL P Gain2 as a percentage to the low speed gain CON 23 ASR SL P Gain1 This causes the responsiveness to decrease if P Gain 2 falls below 100 0 For example if CON 23 ASR SL P Gain1 is 50 0 and CON 23 ASR SL P Gain2 is 50 0 then the speed controller P gain for moderate or high speeds is 25 0 You can also set CON 24 ASR SL Gain2 as a percentage of CON 24 ASR SL Gain1 For gain the smaller gain 2 is the slower the response time is For example if CON 23 ASR SL Gain1 is 100 msec and CON 23 ASR SL Gain2 is 50 0 then the speed controller gain for moderate or high speeds is 200 msec Set the controller gain to meet the default motor parameters and accel decel time Observer Controller Gain of the Magnetic Flux CON 26 Observer Gain1 CON27 Observer Gain2 CON 28 Observer Gain3 For Sensorless Il Vector control you must use an observer to estimate the stator current and rotor magnetic flux of the motor Observer Gain1 CON 26 applies to the low middle speed zone Observer Gain2 CON 27 and Observer Gain3 CON 28 apply to the middle high speed zone and torque mode respectively DO NOT change the default settings for the observer gains unless otherwise authorized Observer Gain2 CON 27 and Observer Gain3 CON 28 only appear whe
176. llowing conditions Store the inverter in an area which complies with the recommended storage environment guidelines See page vi If the storage period exceeds three months store the inverter at a temperature of between 10 and 30 C to prevent thermal degradation of the electrolytic capacitor Package the inverter to prevent moisture from accumulating inside it Ensure that the inverter is stored with a relative humidity of less than 7096 by placing a desiccant silica gel packet inside the packaging If the inverter is exposed to humidity or dust e g if it is installed on construction equipment detach it from the equipment before storing it under the conditions set forth on page vi If the inverter is not supplied with electricity for a long period of time the electrolytic condenser may suffer from thermal degradation To prevent this from happening connect the power supply to the inverter for 30 60 minutes at least once a year Do not perform any wiring or other operation on the output secondary side of the inverter vii LS1s Table of Contents Table of Contents ABOUT THIS MANUAL orn ill SAFETY PRECAUTIONS roadie aaa aaia aabt AAAA RA IV USAGE PRECAUTIONS oera E AS VI TABLE OF CONTENTS Saaren aana ana anaa a aS tata snas tata A snis AES IX 1 size Uie 1 1 1 1 Pr d ct OVGIVIOW EE 1 1 1 2 Products with a Built in Braking Resistor capacity less than
177. load cell s maximum capacity to measure force load is less than 20 kgf you just need to set the tension command to 50 10 20 100 For open loop systems the tension command is conceptually identical to the torque and is based on the output torque value of the minimum diameter For example if an output torque value of 10 is required to maintain the desired tension at the minimum diameter you should set the tension command to 10 to ensure that the same tension can be maintained at the maximum diameter The tension command may be issued through a keypad analog input communication etc Taper Source Keypad lo D V 3 Taper b gt Ls v2 Lo Lo SetPt i2 yl 1 PID Ref Source PID Ref e Set ED Keypad Yi vw em Taper Sel None Linear Tension Hyperbolic PID Ref Ramp pip Ref Value 2 Int 485 y rae Y 1 o a Tns Boost In Tns Down In Tns Boost Type Tns Down Type LSis 21 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 12 1 Tension Command Code Factory number ey Name default Range APP 17 PID Ref PID reference Read Only Value monitor APP 19 PIDRetset P reference 50 00 100 100 setting keypad 0 Keypad 1 V1 2 n 3 v2 APP 20 PID Ret Sro PID reference o Keypad 4 2 selection 5 Int 485 6 Encoder 7 Fieldbus 8 PLC
178. lt i 0 No APP 84 Rev Tension En Reverse tension 0 No selection 1 Yes APP84 Rev Tension En In Fig 1 7 1 suppose that the sign for U1 96 i e main speed command 96 PID output is negative Under these circumstances if you select Yes for this code and issue a forward Fwd operation command then the inverter can operate in the reverse direction However if you select No as the factory default for this code and issue a forward Fwd operation command then the inverter cannot operate in reverse and the output frequency is limited to 0 Hz Select 1 Yes for this function If the PID output is negative when the main speed command is 0 operate the inverter in reverse until it reaches the absolute value of the PID output to maintain the tension on the material in the closed loop tension control system Splicing Group eens Function Name ati Range IN 65 72 Px Define Multi function Web Splice input setting APP 93 Splice Level Splicing level 0 0 0 0 100 0 A splicing system consists of 2 inverters that can control each motor which allows you to replace bobbins during operation When replacing the bobbin be sure not to change the flux When the multi function input specified in 57 Web Splice of the inverter turns ON it interrupts the output of the Web PID controller and the final speed command of the inverter is determined only by Eq 1
179. may be longer than the specified Acc Dec time due to the time required to return to normal operation from the energy saving operation LSis 54 5 Applied Functions 5 19 Speed Search Operation 5 50 This function prevents situations that could happen when the inverter is provided with the output voltage while the inverter output voltage is cut off and the motor is idling This determines the rotation speed of motor based on the output current of he inverter without measuring the actual speed CON 71 Speed Search E 0000 Bit Less than 75 kW 150 CON 72 SS Sup Current More than 90 kW 100 CON 73 SS P Gain 100 2 CON 74 SS I Gain E 200 3 CON 75 SS Block Time 1 0 Sec OUT 31 32 Relay 1 2 19 Speed Search OUT 33 Q1 Define bottom no bit is set Bit setting status On CON 71 Speed Search Selects one oi he point of Bit setting off state Off the following types of speed searches If he switch appears at the top the bit is set If the point ap pears at the Setting type Function Bit4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 The right side of the display is bit 1 v Select speed search for acceleration Y When starting on a reset after a trip occurs Y When restarting after a momentary power interruption Y When starting at the same time as the power is input LSis 5 Applied Functions 1 Select Speed Search for Accelera
180. mp En Selects computation of the diameter compensation gain for accel decel If you select No the system computes the compensation gain only in zones where constant speed is determined If you select Yes the system computes the compensation gain in all accel decel zones AP2 86 Steady Chk LPF When you only compute the diameter compensation gain in constant speed zones this code applies the Low Pass Filter to the current output frequency so that you can determine applicable constant speed zones and compare the gain to the current output frequency APP87 Steady Chk Lev When you only compute the diameter compensation gain in constant speed zones specify the difference between the current output frequency and the filtered output frequency to determine the constant speed zone When the difference exceeds the value specify in AP2 87 the system considers it an accel decel zone and does not compute the compensation gain LSis 2 49 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 250 LSis 3 Capstan Operation 3 3 1 Capstan Operation Overview Capstans are devices that wind up and pull heavy objects at a constant speed The capstan is positioned between the unwinder and winder in iron making steel making and steel casting processes to maintain a constant tension and enable continuous processing Like the winder unwinder the capstan in an iS7 inverter receives analog quantity feedback from tension control det
181. mple if inverter 1 2 and 3 are interlocked and operating within a system in which their current output frequency is 25 Hz 40 Hz and 60 Hz respectively these inverters all take the same decel time of 3 sec to decelerate which is the factory default for APP82 Q Stop Dec T when the multi function input Web Quick Stop turns ON Here the output of the Web PID controller is effective so the inverter output remains uninterrupted and the tension remains constant Factory Group Code number Function Name default Range n Multi function input 50 Web In 65 72 Px Define setting Quick Stop Emergency stop APP 82 O Stop Dec T decel time 3 0 sec 0 1 300 0 sec APP82 Guick Stop DecT Maintains a constant tension during inverter operation in a closed loop tension control system that uses a dancer or load cell and specifies the deceleration time for emergency stops Even when the Web Quick Stop terminal block input turns ON and emergency stop is enabled the inverter output remains uninterrupted After an emergency stop make sure that the inverter operation command turns OFF to ensure that the inverter output is interrupted LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 4 Tension Command Section The tension command is computed as a percentage and is conceptually identical to the force kgf For example if you want to maintain a constant force load of 10 kgf in a system where the
182. n and diameter computation begins again so the frequency of inverter is once again determined by Eq 1 7 5 Fig 1 7 2 6 6 Speed Bias Factory default Function Name Range APP 91 Web Spd Bias Speed bias setting 1 00 Hz 0 00 60 00 Hz APP91 Web Spd Bias Add frequency value as much as the value specified in APP91 to the command speed to output the final command speed This value is only effective in open loop speed control mode APP02 W Spd Open U Spd Open Add the speed bias value and saturate speed controller in open loop speed control mode to output the torque limit value and thereby operate inverter LSis 239 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 8 Analog Output Section Main speed PID Ra Analog output V or gt A Main Speed Ref A Bypass Gain Web Bypass P1 P8 Off Inverter in operation Normal state rather than inverter trip Code Factory Group number Function Name default Range Multi function IN 65 72 Px Define input setting Web Bypass OUT 01 07 AO1 AO2 Mode 47419 output 1 We Spd Out APP 83 Bypass Gain Bypass gain 100 0 0 0 300 0 During normal inverter operation multi function input Web Bypass turns OFF he inverter is operating and works without a trip you can export the main speed PID output to an analog output AO1 0 10 V voltage AO2 0 20 mA curr
183. n A E 06 OhtA06 T nese 10 4096 1024 x 5295540 o o o o o Pulse Num encoder pulses Feedback 08 Oh1A08 Enc Monitor monitor O 5 29 5 40 o ojojoj o Reference 09 OhtA09 Pulse Monitor P ferene o o o o o o 10 Oh1AOA Enc Filter Encoder input 910900 msec 3 o o o o o o Min pulse of OhtA0B Enc Pulse xt Me Pemut 0 100kHz 000 o o x o x o Output at 12 Oh1A0C Enc Perc y1 the Enc min 0 100 0 00 O O X O xX O pulse 13 OhtA0D Enc Pulsex2 Max pulse of 0 200 kHz 100 o o x o x o the Enc input Output at 14 Oh1A0E Enc Perc y2 the Enc max 0 100 100 O O X O X O pulse sanote PLC option 2 OhtA3A PLC LED Status PEG option o Option o o o o o PLC option 59 OhtA3B PLC S W Ver card SW 1X o Option olo o o o version 60 OhtA3C PLC Wr Data 1 0 FFFF Hex 0000 o Option ololololo 61 Oh1A3D PLC Wr Data 2 0 FFFF Hex 0000 o Option ololololo 62 OhtA3E PLC Wr Data 3 0 FFFF Hex 0000 o Option ololololo 63 Oh1A3F PLC Wr Data 4 0 FFFF Hex 0000 o Option ololololo 64 OhtA40 PLC Wr Dala 5 0 FFFF Hex 0000 o Option ololololo 65 OhtA41 PLC Wr Data 6 0 FFFF Hex 0000 o Option ololololo 66 OhtA42 PLC Wr Data 7 0 FFFF Hex 0000 o Option ololololo 67 Oh1A43 PLC Wr Data 8 0 FFFF Hex 0000 o Option ololololo E Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that only appear when setting corresponding codes Note 45 APO 01 14 only appear when an encoder board is installed Note 46 APO 5
184. n Ramp Group Code Function Name Factory default Range number IN 65 72 Px Define Multi function input 55 Web PI setting Gain2 PID controller APP 22 PID P Gain proportional gain 50 0 0 0 1000 0 APP 23 PID I Time FD controllor 10 05 0 0 200 0 s integral time APP 45 PID P2 Gain _ PID controller 100 0 0 0 1000 0 proportional gain 2 APP 46 PID I2 Time PID controller 20 0s 0 0 200 0 s integral time 2 PI gain switching ramp time 30 0 sec 0 0 300 0 sec APP 50 PI Gain Ramp APP50 PI Gain Ramp This code is the ramp time applicable when P I gain switching occurs due to a change in the multi function input Web PI Gain2 during inverter operation In addition to this this code also applies when you use he loader to change the P I gain during inverter operation Ramp time switching is based on 1000 for the P gain and 200 sec for the I gain For example it akes 3 sec 30 100 1000 to change the P gain from 100 to 200 when APP50 PI Gain Ramp is set to 30 sec Table 1 5 2 Selecting the P I gain depending on the multi function input Web PI Gain2 Status of the mu nenon input Web P I gain selected Off APP22 PID P Gain APP23 PID l Time On APP45 PID P2 Gain APP46 PID I2 Time 222 LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 4 P I gain Switching switching by speed The ramp time can change the PI gain value based on v
185. n and auxiliary motors Operating only a specific motor affects the lifespan of that motor Thus if certain conditions are met you should change the operation order of the motors to maintain uniform hours of use APO 35 Auto Ch Mode Selects the operation type for the auto change function 0 None The operation order of the auxiliary motors begins with the motor specified in APO 21 starting auxiliary motor selection while not operating under the auto change function 1 Aux The operation order of the auxiliary motors begins with the motor specified in APO 21 starting auxiliary motor selection The auto change condition is met when the accumulated operating time of one main motor and one auxiliary motor exceeds the auto change time APO 36 When the main motor stops due to a stop command or slip operation mode after fulfilling an auto change condition the starting order of the auxiliary motors specified in APO 21 changes For example if there are 4 auxiliary motors in operation and you specify No 4 in APO 21 the starting order of the auxiliary motors automatically changes to No 1 Therefore the existing operating order of the auxiliary motors 4 1 2 and 3 changes to 2 3 and 4 Once another auto change condition is met the order changes to 2 3 4 and 1 5 3 Phase input RST Inverter U T T T 1 KD3 KDA SSAA OES ON MAES NNS ARN NNN M1 KM1 KM2 K
186. n modified or repaired somewhere other than our agency or service center If there is no LSIS name plate attached If the warranty period is over Please visit the LSIS homepage http www lsis com for more useful information and services LSis B5 Manual Revision History Manual Revision History No Date of Publication Contents Changed Version Number Remarks 1 20080430 0 01 1 2 20080718 0 02 2 3 20080721 1 00 3 Modified the content of 4 20080813 3 2 Automated Speed 1 01 4 Torque Switching Added content on 3 3 E 20091104 External PID Controller i 2 6 20091117 Modified web only 1 08 6 common area Modified content concerning the external Z 20100309 PID control section 3 3 1 04 7 and dedicated common areas 8 20100512 E 1 05 8 9 20110128 Added content concerning 1 07 9 braking resistance Added content concerning the Open loop Winder and Tension Control Mode 10 20120426 1 10 10 Added Web PID improvement web without diameter calculation B6 LSis LS values every single customer Quality and service come first at LSIS Always at your service standing for our customers www lsis com LSS 10310001170 W HEAD OFFICE Address LS tower 1026 6 Hogye dong Dongan gu Anyang si Gyeonggi do 431 848 Korea WWw lsis com E LSIS Europe B V Amsterdam Netherland Address 1st FL Tupoleviaan 48 111
187. n the desired tension In other words this function reduces the PID reference by the computed diameter and compensates for the size of the vector caused by stress Fig 1 4 1 provides a detailed conceptual diagram and the related equations In terms of the tension sensor tapering is applied based on the load on the load cell weight sensor rather than the dancer position sensor LSis 213 2 Winder Unwinder Operation Web Desired tension gt Resulting tension Foll Hyperbolic Taper Core Size Tension Demand Tension Spt x 100 Taper Spt x 1 Diameter Linear Taper Tension Demand Tension Spt x 100 Taper Spt x Diameter Core Size Tension Tension Hyperbolic 4 Linear 100 taper setting 100 taper setting 0 taper setting EHI 0 taper setting 100 taper setting 4 100 taper setting gt gt Min diameter 100 diameter Min diameter 100 diameter Fig 1 4 1 Tension variation trend based on the concept and taper setting 214 LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 3 Tension BoostiDown 4 The following table outlines the boost down setting ranges for the tension PID Reference Code Factory Group number Fun N default Range IN 65 72 Px Define Multi function 59 Web Boost J input setting En IN 65 72 Px Define Multi function 60 Web Down
188. n without Diameter Computation Code Factory Group number Function default Selection of web 0 No AP2 80 Dia Dis Mode without diameter 0 No computation 1 Yes Select this option to compute the final speed command without using the diameter value If you select Yes in AP2 80 you can compute the speed command using the main speed compensation gain and PID output value For more details please see Eq 1 7 6 Final speed 2 Main speed x compensatbn gain PID Output Eq 1 7 6 The web function without diameter computation is only valid in closed loop speed control mode APP02 W Spd Close U Spd Close For more details on the web function without diameter computation please see section 1 12 Web Function without Diameter Computation The final speed Hz is the final value of Eq 1 7 5 which is regularly computed in the final speed computation section so acceleration and deceleration occur frequently Here the accel and decel time is specified in DRVO3 Acc Time and DRV04 Dec Time respectively Moreover selecting 5 Tension Ctrl in APPO1 App Mode automatically sets both DRV03 Acc Time and DRV04 Dec Time to 0 5 sec You can set different values for DRVO3 Acc Time and DRV04 Dec Time but they must be less than 2 0 sec in order to rapidly reflect the final speed LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 4 5 Reverse Tension P Factory Function defau
189. n you select 1 Yes in SL2 G View Sel CON 20 Speed Estimator Controller Gain CON 29 S Est P Gain1 CON30 S Est I Gain1 These change the speed estimator gain for Sensorless II Vector control When the speed indication does not fit the target value for the normal status you can increase or decrease the speed estimator P gain or gain Moreover you can adjust these gains if severe vibrations or current ripples occur in the motor when a load is applied Test the effects of reducing the speed estimator P gain or gain The speed estimator gain setting is set to meet the default motor parameters and accel decel time CON 31 S Est P Gain2 CON 32 S Est I Gain2 These only appear when you select No 1 Yes for SL2 G View Sel CON 20 They change the gain of the Speed estimator at moderate or high speeds ca 1 2 of base frequency when controlling the Sensorless II Vector You can set CON 31 S Est P Gain2 and CON32 S Est Gain2 as a percentage 96 of low speed gains CON 29 S Est P Gain1 and CON 30 S Est I Gain1 respectively For example when CON 29 S Est P Gain1 is 300 and CON 31 S Est P Gain2 is 40 0 the speed estimator P gain at middle or high speeds is equal to 120 You can set this P Gain1 in the same manner as the low middle speed gain The speed estimator gain setting must meet the default motor parameters and accel decel time LSis 5 Applied Functions CON 34 SL2 OVM Pere The overmodulation zone does not appe
190. nal functions web brake detection emergency stop bypass reverse crawling etc if necessary Appendix B Setting the Parameters B 2 Setting Unwinder Parameters 1 Use the mechanical information about the unwinder from Table A1 1 to enter the APP92 Max Main Spd setting The APP92 Max Main Spd setting determines the maximum rotation speed of the motor Hz or RPM at the minimum diameter and maximum linear speed Use the following formula to calculate the APP92 setting 25 A Poles APP 92 Max Main Spd PL 5 Belt ratio x 9l 55 sQ gz 0 3m x c 120 Release the DRV20 Max Freq limit to set the APP92 Max Main Spd To account for the frequency added from the PID controller enter approx 1 2 times the APP92 Max Main Spd setting to the DRV20 Max Freq 2 Now enter the bobbin diameter The following formula uses the minimum diameter of 0 3 m and the maximum diameter of 1 5 m from Fig A1 1 to calculate the ratio of the maximum diameter to the min diameter as a percentage B 0 3 m Minimum Diameter x 100 20 0196 1 5 m Enter the calculated 20 0 as the APP67 Min Diameter setting Enter 100 0 as the APP63 Bobbin 1 Diameter setting since this is the maximum diameter 3 Like the winder be sure to reset the bobbin diameter when replacing a bobbin To do this you must assign a function that resets the bobbin diameter to one of the multi function inputs Select an IN c
191. nd A l Fx or Rx On gt Go LSis Speed mode operation starting Torque mode operation Torque mode free run stop set CON87 Trq Exch Dec to Torque Factory default Speed mode deceleration stop set CON87 Trq Exch Dec to Speed 4 Other Functions Code 4 Factory Group number Function Name default Range Automated speed torque switching CON 86 Trq Exch Freq frequency when 0 00 Hz 0 30 Hz operating in torgue mode Deceleration 0 Torque CON 87 Trq Exch Dec metod when 0 Torque operating in 1 Speed torque mode Torque variation CON 88 Tra mon j Daten ne far 5 0 sec 0 300 sec amp automatic switching CON86 Trq Exch Freq When you start the motor in torque mode this code sets the frequency at which the motor switches from speed mode to torque mode When set to 0 00 Hz speed torque does not automatically switch over so the motor skips speed mode and starts in torque mode and always runs in torque mode For example when you set CON86 Trq Exch Freq to 3 00 Hz the motor runs in speed mode from startup until it reaches 3 Hz and then automatically switches to torque mode once the frequency rises above 3 Hz Sensorless 1 Sensorless 2 Sensored DRV10 Torque Control Yes Yes Yes No IN65 75 P Define Speed torque input gl on Operation mode Torque mode Torque mode Torque mode CON87 Trq Exch Dec Allows you to select how to stop
192. nd decel time for the main speed setting When you select Yes in this code the ramp time for the main speed increases decreases based on the accel decel time input in APPO7 Main Spd AccT and APP14 Main Spd DecT The factory default setting for this code is No With this setting you must ensure that the ramp time for the main speed increases decreases according to the external upper controller Otherwise the main speed command is entered during each step and the system may function unstably APP07 Main Spd AccT APP14 Main Spd DecT These codes appear when Yes is selected in APPO6 Main XcelT En This code sets the accel and decel times for the main speed setting The accel decel time is based on the main LSis 29 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 10 2 speed equal to 100 For example when APP07 Main Spd AccT is set to 10 sec i e the factory default setting it takes 5 sec 210 sec 50 100 to accelerate the main speed from 0 to 50 Emergency Stop Quick Stop If an emergency occurs in a closed loop tension control system that uses a dancer or load cell you can use the Quick Stop to maintain the tension and quickly stop system operation This function stops inverter operation for the time specified in APP82 Q Stop Dec T when the multi function input set as Web Quick Stop turns ON The deceleration time remains constant regardless of the current output frequency of the inverter For exa
193. ng Tension 49 0h1831 Rama command 0 3000sec 50 o 245 o O O X x Pp ramp time m PI gain ma 0h1832 PI Oan switching 0 0 300 0 sec 30 0 o 222 ololo x x Ramp ramp time m PID output Sta 0h1833 PID Stat ramp time at 0 0 300 0sec 50 o 217 o o o x x am startup PID output E 0h1834 ep upper limit pr EET o 217 o O O X x 2 n 0 PID output pg PID Lo p 100 0 to dn 0h1835 E lower limit to 100 0 o 217 o O O X x Lmt Rh APPS 2 save 0h1836 Fixed PIDEn FixedPID 0 No 0 No o 234 ololo x x LSis 937 6 Table of Functions Communication Function Setting Initial Change Reference Control address display range value mode J controller selection Yes Minimum ss Min Fixed value of the gt 36 0h1837 PID fixed PID 0 07 100 0 10 0 o 2 94 o o o x x controller Profile P PGan oi None 56 0h1838 Mod profiler 1 Linear 0 None o 2 20 o o o x x selection 2 Square ote n 0h1839 Profle P Profiler gain 0 01 10 00 1 00 o 2 20 olo lo x x Tapering 0 None 58 Oh183A Taper Sel function 1 Linear 0 None x 243 o o o x x selection 5 Hyperbolic Taper setting 59 0h183B Taper SetPt value 100 100 0 00 o 243 o o o x x keypad o Keypad 1 vi 60 0h183C Taper Source per setting z n 0 x 243 olo o x x selection Keypad 3 v2 4 12 Note
194. ng this item measures the parameters while the motor rotates When auto tuning is complete you can save the motor stator resistance Rs leakage inductance Lsigma stator inductance Ls and no load current Noload Curr values CON 21 ASR SL P Gain1 CON 22 ASR SL I Gain1 These codes change the speed controller gain of Sensorless Vector control Set the controller gain to meet the default motor parameters and accel decel time You can adjust the controller gain to meet the load characteristics However the motor may overheat or the system may become unstable due to the controller gain settings DRV 10 Torque Control You can select which speed and torque control modes to use for Sensorless I Vector control Set torque control DRV 10 to Yes to operate the inverter in torque control mode For more details on torque control mode see section 5 14 Torque Control Select Control In torque control mode DO NOT switch the forward rotation command to a reverse rotation command or vice versa while operating the inverter This can cause an overcurrent trip or reverse deceleration error Select Speed Search for sensorless vector control if the inverter starts during a motor free run CON 71 Speed Search Speed search setting during acceleration 0001 LSis 5x 5 Applied Functions 5 12 Sensorless II Vector Control
195. nput terminal and set the function of the terminal for the No 1 to 4 Interlocks to determine if the motor operates according to the terminal input status The order of the substitution operation depends on the value of the motor auto change mode selection APO 35 as previously described IN 65 72 75 Px Define Selects the terminal to use as an interlock from those numbered 65 to 72 No 75 where there is an expansion I O in the input terminal block function group IN Specify interlocks 1 to 4 according to the order of the motors Assuming that the selection of the auto change mode APO 35 is set to 0 None or 1 Aux and there are 4 motors operating in total including the main motor the interlocks numbered 1 2 and 3 correspond to the motors connected to Relays 1 2 and Q1 if Auxiliary Motors 1 2 and 3 are connected to the inverter output terminals Relays 1 2 and Q1 However the interlocks numbered 1 2 3 and 4 correspond to the motors connected to Relays 1 2 Q1 and Q2 if the auto change mode selection APO 35 is set to No 2 Main and the main auxiliary motors are connected to the inverter output terminals Relays 1 2 Q1 and Q2 respectively using an expansion I O APO 38 Interlock Specifies No 1 as Yes When the total number of motors is 5 and the auto change mode selection APO 35 is set to 0 None or 1 Aux they operate in the following manner If a fault occurs in Auxiliary Motor 3 while it is stationary
196. ntrol Modes Brake release sequence If you issue an operation command while the motor is stopped the motor accelerates up to the brake release frequency ADV 44 and 45 according to the forward or reverse direction When the brake release frequency is reached and the current flowing in the motor reaches the brake release current BR RIs Curr then the brake release signal is outputted to the output relay defined for brake control or the multi function output terminal Maintain the frequency during the brake release delay time BR Rls Dly and then accelerate Brake engage sequence The motor decelerates if the stop command is inputted during operation If the output frequency reaches the brake engage frequency BR Eng Fr the deceleration stops and the brake engage signal is issued to the output terminal After maintaining the frequency during the brake engage delay period BR Eng Dly the output frequency becomes 0 If the DC 576 LSis 5 Applied Functions brake time ADV 15 and DC braking quantity ADV 16 are defined cut off the inverter power after DC braking Vector Control Modes Brake release sequence If you enter an operation command the brake release Signal is output to the output terminal after the initial excitation period Start acceleration after the brake release delay period BR Rly Dly Brake engage sequence If you enter the stop command the system decelerates to the zero 0 speed and outputs the b
197. number of restarts decreases by 1 every time an automatic restart is executed When it becomes zero the system cannot execute an automatic restart if a trip occurs If a trip does not occur within 60 seconds of the automatic restart then the number of automatic restarts returns to the previous level set in the inverter The maximum number is limited to the number of restarts An automatic restart is not executed if the inverter stops due to a low voltage emergency stop Bx inverter overheat or hardware error HW Diag The acceleration operation at automatic restart has the same characteristics as the speed search operation Therefore you can set the functions of CON 72 75 based on the load For more details on the speed search function refer to page 8 36 If the number of automatic restart is set the inverter reset function is disabled and the motor rotates freely after a trip occurs LSis 5 Applied Functions The following figure shows a case when the number of automatic restarts is set to 2 Y We occurs At constant speed Frequency Voltage 4 PR Speed search Reset operation E Operation lc 30 sec Number of automatic 1 2 restarts LSis 555 5 Applied Functions 5 21 Operation Sound Selection Code A Group number Function Range Unit CON 04 Carrier Freq A 5 0 0 7 15 kHz kHz N i Normal PWM orm
198. o 1 as Yes This description concerns operating the inverter when the total number of main and auxiliary motors APO 33 is 4 When the feedback input value is between 0 and 10 V and the operation frequency for the maximum input value 10 V is 60 Hz operate Auxiliary Motor 1 when 2 5 V of feedback is input operation frequency of the main motor 15 Hz When the feedback reaches 5 V again operate Auxiliary Motor 2 Therefore all three auxiliary motors operate at the maximum input of 10 V Max feedback magnitude Number of auxiliary motors APO 33 Operation level of the nth auxiliary motor n 586 LSis 5 Applied Functions 5 40 Regeneration Evasion Function for Press Used to avoid braking in the regeneration condition during press operation While operating the press this function prevents the regeneration area by automatically increasing the motor operation speed in the motor regeneration status Code Function display Setting Indication and Initial value number range 0 No ADV 74 RegenAvd Sel 0 No 1 Yes 200 V product 300 400 V 350v ADV 75 RegenAvd Level V 400 V product 600 800 V TOON ADV 76 CompFreq Limit 0 10 00 Hz 1 00 Hz Hz ADV 77 RegenAvd Pgain 0 100 0 50 0 ADV 78 RegenAvd Igain 20 30000 msec 500 msec msec ADV 74 RegenAvd Sel Selection of regeneration evasion function for press If a regeneration voltage such as a press load occurs f
199. o gt o o o o o Mode Run at option trip 2 Dec Low voltage fault 81 Oh1B51 LVT Delay 0 60 0 sec 0 0 x o o o o o judgment delay time EE Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that only appear when setting corresponding codes Note 49 PRT 49 only appears when PR 48 Stall Src Sel is set to 1 or more LSis 6 47 6 Table of Functions 6 12 Parameter Mode 2nd Motor Function Group 3 M2 Note 50 Communication address Function play Reference page Jump Code Jump code 75 kW 20 0 orless 04 ohico4 M2 Acc Time Acceleration o Goo sec og Kw o olo x o x time or 60 0 more 75 kW 30 0 Deceleration nmm 05 Oh1C05 M2 Dec Time dk 0 600sec gokw o o o x o x or 90 0 more 0 0 2kW 06 Oh1C06 M2 Capacity Motor capacity x o o x o x 21 185 kW 07 Oh1C07 M2 Base Freq Base frequency 30 400 Hz 60 00 x o o x o x o ve 1 were 08 0h1Co8 M2 Ctrl Mode Controlmode 2 SlipCompen o we x oo x o x 3 Sensorless 1 4 Sensorless 2 Number of 10 Oh1C0A M2 Pole Num motor poles 2 12 4 x oo x o x 11 OhtC0B M2 Rated Slip hein 0 3000 rpm x olo x o x 12 ohicoc M2 Rated Curr Motor rated 1 200A x o lo x o x current M2 Noload Motor no load 13 Oh1COD nm ich 0 5 200A X o Rko E GR eNe 14 Oh1C0E M2 Ra
200. o it requires more negative inertia compensation For this inertia compensation P gain should increase as the diameter increases It is expressed in the following equation Fig 1 5 2 shows how the P gain varies depending on the diameter None Inertiacompensation P Gain P Gain Linear Innertia compensation P Gain Diameter Bobbin Diameter P Gain x 41 Profile P Gain APP57 x Full Diameter Full Diameter Square Innertiacompensation P Gain Diameter Bobbin Diameter P Gain x41 profile P Gain x Full Diameter Full Diameter LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation P Profile None P Profile Linear P Profile Square A A Diameter Diameter Diameter gt gt gt n 4 4 P gain P gain P gain Kp Kp Kp d gt gt gt Fig 1 5 2 The P gain trend varies depending on the APP56 settings Profile P Mode LSis 22 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 3 P I gain Switching changing the gain during multi function input and operation During inverter operation system response may become unstable if the P I gain Switches over momentarily without switching the ramp time when the multi function input Web PI Gain2 changes This may also occur if you manually change the APP22 PID P Gain and APP23 PID I Time settings In order to avoid this risk make sure the P I gain switching changes slowly along with the proper setting in APP50 PI Gai
201. o x x basis Diameter 84 Oh1954 D pee compensation aed 50 0 o 2 48 o o o x x gain filter Selection of diameter 0 No 85 0h1955 Xcel Comp compensation 0 No o 2 49 olojo x x En gain computation during 1 Yes accel decel Note Speed filter for 9 _ o 0h1956 Steady Chk determining 951900 1 0 o 2 49 o o o x x LPF sec constant speed Speed difference 87 0h1957 Steady Chk for determining 0 50 00 1 00 o 2 49 olojo x x constant speed Note 42 AP2 80 only appears when APP 02 Tnsn Ctrl Mode is set to W_Spd Close and UW Spd Close Note 43 AP2 81 85 only appear when AP2 80 Dia Dis Mode is set to Yes Note 44 AP2 86 87 only appear when AP2 85 Xcel Comp En is set to No LSis 541 6 Table of Functions 6 10 Parameter Mode Option Card Function Group 3 APO Communication address Setting range Reference page Control mode Jump Code Jump code 0 99 Note Ei 2 EROS 5 29 5 31 o1Nete nc Encoder 29 5 31 la OhtA01 Opt Mode funcionem Feedback O None o E o o o o o Reference Line Driver Totem or Ei 0 Li 5 25 5 29 04 Oh1A04 us si MM pan x A o o o o o Type Sel selection Driver 5 39 2 Open Collector R o 8 nc 05 0h1A05 Encoder pulse A B x 529 539 o o o o o Pulse Sel direction A B o
202. ode between IN65 72 P Define and then set it to 52 Web Preset 4 Finally set the operation command method in DRVO6 Cmd Source the parameters related to the main speed command in APPO3 14 and the PID controller in APP 15 57 or any other additional functions web brake detection emergency stop bypass reverse crawling etc if necessary LSis 83 Appendix B Setting the Parameters B 3 Setting Capstan Parameters 1 84 LSis Use the mechanical information about Capstan 1 2 and 3 from Table A1 1 to enter the APP92 Max Main Spd setting The APP92 Max Main Spd setting determines the maximum rotation speed of the motor Hz or RPM at the reference thickness of the material 100 and at the maximum linear speed Use the following formula to calculate the APP92 setting ASO mpni A Poles Capstan 1 APP 92 Max Main Spd x 7 3 Belt ratio x 58 12 Hz O 6 m x 7 120 340 mpm A Poles Capstan2 APP 92 Max Main Spd x 9 7 Belt ratio x 58 35 Hz 0 6m x2 120 250 mpml 4 Poles Capstan3 APP 92 Max Main Spd x 13 4 Belt ratio x 59 27 Hz 0 6m xx 120 Release the DRV20 Max Freq limit for each inverter to set the APP92 Max Main Spd setting for each inverter To account for the frequency added from the PID controller enter approx 1 2 times the APP92 Max Main Spd to the DRV20 Max Freq Finally set the operation command metho
203. og operation the priority for the Acc Dec time and terminal block input Dwell 3 wire up down etc is the same as for Jog Operation 1 Even if you input an operation command during jog operation the inverter continues to operate at the jog frequency LSis 5 Applied Functions DRY 12 Acc time DRV 13 Dec time DR 411 Jog frequency log frequency LSis 57 5 Applied Functions 5 8 3 Keypad based Jog Operation Function Function display settings CNF gt 42 Multi Key Sel 1 JOG Key PAR DRV 06 Cmd Source 0 Keypad 0 5 sec Px P1 P8 P9 P11 option Set the 42 code of Config CNF mode using the 1 JOG Key Set the DRV 06 code of Parameter PAR mode using the 0 Keypad When you press the Multi key the J icon on the upper portion of the display screen inverts y This indicates that you can perform jog operation using the keypad You can press and hold the forward FWD or reverse REV operation key on the keypad to operate the inverter at the jog frequency setting DRV 11 JOG Frequency The inverter stops operating if you do not press the FWD or REV key DRV 12 and DRV 13 set the accel decel ramp time to the jog operation frequency When DRV 12 Acc time setting with N DRV 13 Dec time Pa multi key jog DRV11 Jogfreguency N DRV 11 Jog frequency REV key C LSis 5 Applied Functions 5 3 Up Down Operation
204. og output 3 AO3 OhODOD Expansion l O 2 AO4 0 01 96 Expansion l O 2 analog output 4 AO4 OhODOE External PID controller output 0 01 External PID controller APPO1 App Mode Ext PID Ctrl output OhODOF External PID controlleroutput 0 01 Hz Extemal PID controller APPO1 App Mode Ext PID Ctrl output Hz ghiota External PID controller output P RPM Pure PID controller APPO1 App Mode Ext PID Ctrl output onon Reserved alt 710 LS1S 7 iS7 Communication Common Areas 7 4 Common Areas for iS7 Dedicated product control Communicat Pari ter Scale Assigned content by b ion Address y OhOD80 Web Main Spd 0 1 Main speed command OhOD81 Reserved l ohoDs2 Reserved dl 0h0D83 Reserved dl 0h0D84 Reserved dl OhOD85 External PID controller main speed input 0 01 s Extemal PID controller APPO1 App Mode Ext PID Ctrl main speed input External PID controller APPO1 App Mode Ext PID Oh0D86 External PID controller main speed input 0 01 Hz Gtr main speed input Hz External PID controller APPO1 App Mode Ext PID ohoDs7 External PID controller main speed input 0 RPM Cr main speed input RPM OhOD88 OhODFF Reserved e LSis 7 11 7 iS7 Communication Common Areas 7 12 LSis Appendix A Sample Web only Parameter Settings Appendix A Sample Web only Parameter Settings Overview This appendix uses
205. ol systems that do not use a Web PID or tension control detectors like dancers and load cells can function using the winder and unwinder from an iS7 inverter The tension control operation of an iS7 inverter can be broadly subdivided into the winder unwinder closed loop open loop and speed tension command operations Fi Motor Speed rpm Fla lmp Eq 1 1 1 diameter x z m The actual diameter m of the winder increases during operation As shown in Eq 1 1 1 the motor speed rpm decreases as the diameter of the winder increases to maintain a constant flux mpm The motor speed i e output frequency of the inverter is reduced by activating the Web PID controller In addition to this the Web PID controller computes and estimates the increases to the diameter of the winder internally and uses the computed diameter ultimately to decrease the output frequency of the inverter In contrast to the winder the actual diameter m of the unwinder decreases during operation As shown in Eq 1 1 1 the motor speed rpm increases as the diameter of the winder decreases to maintain a constant flux mpm In a closed loop tension control system this motor speed i e the output frequency of the inverter is increased by activating the Web PID controller In addition to this the Web PID controller computes and estimates the decreases to the diameter of the winder internally and uses the computed diameter ultimately to increase the output freq
206. ons 0000 FFFF ogg o o o o o address 16 Hex LSis 631 6 Table of Functions Communication Function Group PAR 3 COM Communic Chang e Control mode R Function M ation displa during V sliv MM address Play operati vilci lc Lic on F TP 50 0h1732 Para Ctrl Num 0 8 2 o o o o o o 51 0h1733 Para Control 1 Input address 1 0000 FFFF Hex 0005 x o o o o o 52 0h1734 Para Control 2 Input address 2 0000 FFFFHex 0006 x ojojojojo 53 0h1735 Para Control 3 Input address 3 0000 FFFFHex 0000 X o o o o o 54 0h1736 Para Control 4 Inputaddress 4 0000 FFFFHex 0000 X o o o o o 55 0h1737 Para Contro 5 Inputaddress 5 0000 FFFFHex 0000 x ojojojojo 56 0h1738 Para Control 6 Input address 6 0000 FFFFHex 0000 X o o o o o 57 0h1739 Para Control 7 Input address 7 0000 FFFFHex 0000 x o o o o o 58 Oh173A Para Control 8 Input address 8 0000 FFFFHex 0000 X o o o o o 59 0h173B Para Control 9 Input address 9 0000 FFFF Hex 0005 x o o o o o 60 Oh173C Para Control 10 Input address 10 0000 FFFF Hex 0006 x o o o o o 61 Oh173D Para Control 11 Input address 11 0000 FFFF Hex 0000 x o o o o o 62 Ohi73E Para Control 12 Input address 12 0000 FFFF Hex 0000 x o o o o o 63 Oh178F_ Para Control 13 Input address
207. ontrol mode Moreover DO NOT connect multiple motors to the inverter output when operating the inverter in vector control mode Disconnect any loads connected to the motor shaft Input the motor parameters Input the values for the following items stated on the motor nameplate DRV 14 Motor Capacity Motor capacity BAS 11 Pole Number No of poles BAS 12 Rated Slip Rated slip BAS 13 Rated Curr Rated current BAS 15 Rated Volt Rated voltage BAS 16 Efficiency Efficiency Encoder Option Card Checklist Set the encoder option mode APO 01 to No 1 Feedback Then provide the following information to meet the specifications of the encoder APO 04 Enc Type Sel Selects how to transmit encoder signals Set this option according to the specifications included in the Encoder User Manual Select Line Driver 0 Totem or Com 1 or Open Collect 2 depending on the specification of the encoder APO 05 Enc Pulse Sel Sets the direction of the encoder output pulse You can select 0 A B for the forward operation FWD and 2 A B for the reverse operation REV Select 1 to use the encoder output pulse as a reference for the frequency setting APO 06 Enc Pulse Num Inputs the number of output pulses for each revolution Function display BAS 20 Auto Tuning Enc Test 0 4 D APO 01 Enc Opt Mode Feed back 0 2 APO 04 Enc Type Sel Line Driver 0 2 APO 05 Enc Pulse Sel A B 0 2
208. ontroller M Code Factory Group number Function Name default IN 65 72 Px Define Multi function input 49 Web Dis E setting PID i 0 N APP 15 Web PID En Tension PID control 4 yes 2 selection 1 Yes APP 16 PID Output PID output monitor Read Only APP 18 PID Fdb Value PID feedback Read Only monitor 0 vi 1 n 2 v2 3 12 APP 21 PID F B Src Pip feedback uH selection 4 Int 485 5 Encoder 6 Fieldbus 7 PLC APP 22 PID P Gain FID controller 50 0 0 0 1000 0 proportional gain APP 23 PID I Time FID controller 10 0s 0 0 200 0 s integral time APP 24 PID D Time PID controller 0ms 0 1000 ms differentiation time APP 27 PID Out LPF PID output filter Oms 0 10000 ms APP 28 PID I Limit PID I controller limit 100 096 0 0 100 0 0 N APP 31 PID Out Inv PID output inverse 0 No 2 1 Yes APP 32 PID Out Scale PID output scale 30 0 0 0 1000 0 PID output at start APP 51 PID Start Ramp SUA REA 50s 0 0 300 0 s Ramp time APP 52 PID HiLmt PID output upper 100 0 APP53 100 0 limit APP 53 PIDLoLmt Poutputlower 100 0 100 APP52 limit APP 98 PIDSampleT __ PID controller 1ms 1 10 ms execution frequency LSis 217 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 18 APP15 Web PID En Determines whether to use the Web PID controller This code functions in combination with the multi function input
209. oss 88 0h1258 CPSP measuring 0 100 30 00 o 2 45 X X o x x frequency 5 89 0h1259 ais j Endor oasi gaid s oo o 245 x xlolx x 5 value 5 FricComp Spd Friction loss 0 Max 90 0h125A ji Pd measuring frequency 36 00 o 2 45 x x o x x frequency 6 Hz 91 Oh125B asnus em gas s o 245 X X O X X 6 value 6 FricComp Spd Friction loss _0 Max 92 0h125C ium ui Pd measuring frequency 42 00 o 2 45 Xx Xx 0 X x frequency 7 Hz 93 Oh125D asus ERIS TE men Dag o 245 X X O X X 7 value 7 FricComp Spd Friction loss 0 Max 94 Oh125E ium xus PO measuring frequency 48 00 o 2 45 x x o x x frequency 8 Hz FricComp Trq Friction loss 95 Oh125F bir A 0 100 0 00 o 2 45 sb pss FricComp Spd Friction loss _0 Max 96 0h1260 gr SPd measuring frequency 54 00 o 2 45 x lose eel se frequency 9 Hz FricComp Trq Friction loss 97 0h1261 A value 0 100 0 00 o 2 45 x bx B3 P6 FricComp Friction loss 0 Max 98 0h1262 Socio measuring frequency 60 00 o 2 45 EVOK P frequency 10 Hz FricComp Friction loss 99 0h1263 Tiqid Value 10 07 100 0 00 o 2 45 Al ENESE EE Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that only appear when setting corresponding codes Note 8 BAS 80 to 99 only appears when the APP 01 App Mode is Tension Ctrl LSis 57 6 Table of Functions 6 3 Parameter Mode Expanded Function Group PAR3 ADV
210. parameters are registered in U amp M Mode s user group If required you can 5 register parameters multiple times For example you can register a parameter in user group code No 2 code No 11 etc W Deleting Parameters Registered in User Groups Order Description First select Multi Key in CNF Mode Code 42 and then the 3 UserGrp SelKey icon appears at the top of the screen 2 In U amp M Mode USR Group move the cursor to the code you want to delete 3 Press the MULTI Key 4 A message prompt appears asking you if you want to delete the parameter 5 Select YES and press the PROG ENT key 6 Deletion is completed CNF 25 UserGrp AllDel Select No 1 Yes to delete all of the parameters registered in the user group LSis 59 5 Applied Functions 5 31 Add Macro Group Mode Code number Function display Initial settings display CNF 43 Macro Select 0 None If you select an applied load the inverter selects the related functions so that you can apply the changes to the macro group CNF 43 Macro Select You can use this function to put various application functions into a group for easy setup This causes the macro group called MC1 DRAW function or MC2 Traverse function to appear in the User amp Macro U amp M mode connected to the two functions i e DRAW and Traverse This function is available from inverter You cannot add or delete a function item included in th
211. quency 0 No x 5 o o o x x jump 1 Yes 0 jump Not 12 Lower limit 1 of frequency 28 0h131C Jump Lot icmp frequency upper limits 10 09 o o o o x x Hz Lower limit 1 of Upper limit 1 of ba 29 0h131D Jump Hi 1 UPPS freguency 1 15 00 o E o o o x x jump frequency Max frequency Hz 0 Jump Lower limit 2 of frequency 30 Oh131E Jump Lo 2 20 00 o o o o x x p jump frequency Upper limit 2 Hz Lower limit 2 of Upper limit 2 of jump 31 Ohi31F Jump Hi2 VPper limit of frequency 1 25 00 o o o 0 X x jump frequency Max frequency Hz 0 Jump frequenc 32 0h1320 Jump Lo Lower limit 3 ot quency 30 00 o k o o o x x jump frequency Upper limit 3 Hz Lower limit 3 of Upper limit 3 of KOR f 1 x 33 0h1321 JumpHi3 i frequency equency 35 00 o o o o x x Max frequency Hz aiva 0h1329 BR Rls Curr Biako Leese 0 180 0 50 0 o 5 76 o o olx x Brake release 42 0h132A BR RIs Dly Gelay time 0 1000sec 1 00 x 576 o o o x x enne pwg Brakerelease S 44 0h132C a festa test 1 00 x 5 76 o o o x x frequency 45 Oh132D BR Als Rev Brake release _0 Max 1 00 x 576 o o o x x LSis 9 6 Table of Functions Commu Control address mode reverse frequency Hz frequency 46 Oh132E BR Eng Diy Brake engage o 19 sec 1 00 x 5 76 O O O X X delay time 47 0h132F BR Eng Fr
212. quency and maintains the voltage level in the DC power unit Therefore the system can keep functioning during momentary power interruptions because they do not cause a low voltage trip Group did Function display Unit CON 77 KEB Select 1 Yes CON 78 KEB Start Lev R 130 CON 79 KEB Stop Lev 135 CON 80 KEB Gain gt 1000 CON 77 KEB Select Selects the energy buffering operation for when the input power is cut off If you select No 0 Continue the system performs a general deceleration operation until a low voltage failure occurs If you select No 1 KEB Select the system controls the inverter power frequency and sends the regeneration energy from the motor to charge the DC unit of the inverter CON 78 KEB Start Lev CON 79 KEB Stop Lev These set the start and stop point for the energy buffering operation Set the low voltage level based on 100 so that the stop level CON 79 is higher than the start level CON 78 CON 80 KEB Gain Specifies the gain that uses the load side moment of inertia quantity to control the energy buffering operation If the load inertia is large use he lower gain value Use a higher gain value for smaller load inertia values If the motor vibrates severely when the input power cuts off and the KEB function operates set the gain CON 80 KEB Gain to half of its previous value But lowering the gain too much can cause a low voltage trip during the energy buffering operation K
213. r if the Control Mode DRV 09 is set to Sensorless 2 then the rotor time constant Tr is tuned while the motor is stopped 2 ALL Stdstl Measures the parameters when the motor is stopped Select this mode to measure the stator resistance Rs leakage inductance Lsigma and rotor time constant Tr at the same time You can use this mode when the Control Mode DRV 09 is Sensorless 2 3 Rs Lsigma Measures parameters when the motor is stopped You can use the values measured in auto torque boost and sensorless vector control Since the motor is not rotating loads on the motor do not affect the accuracy of the parameter measurement However you must ensure that the load does not cause the motor shaft to rotate 4 Enc Test Connect the encoder option card to the body of the inverter and then properly connect the encoder lead attached to the motor to the option card As the motor rotates ensure that the wiring is correct and check the A and B pulses for incorrect wiring Be sure to properly set the functions related to encoder when measuring the status of the encoder LSis 5 27 5 Applied Functions e 5 Tr When the Control Mode DRV 09 is Vector measure the rotor time constant Tr as the motor rotates When the Control Mode DRV 09 is Sensorless 2 measure the rotor time constant Tr when the motor is stopped You must tune the rotor time constant Tr again if you change the Control Mode DRV 09
214. r 2 seconds only and is deactivated for the remaining 98 seconds even under braking operation conditions Products with a built in braking resistor can continuously operate the braking resistor for 5 seconds Thus if the braking operation conditions are maintained braking is activated for 5 seconds but is deactivated for the next 245 seconds even under braking operation conditions Therefore if the braking operation is interrupted the braking resistor is unavailable for at least 245 seconds when set at 2 12 LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 2 1 WinderlUnwinder Operation Overview Winders are also called spoolers These components wind up web material iron wire iron plate steel wire etc as they maintain a constant tension in the material In contrast to this unwinders unwind web material as they maintain a constant tension in the material Basically the winder and unwinder in an iS7 inverter use analog feedback from the tension control detectors such as the dancer or load cell to activate the PID controller and maintain a constant tension This way the winder and unwinder form a closed loop tension control system when winding and unwinding web material In addition the characteristics of the PID controller in the closed loop tension control system differ from existing PID controllers That is why this system is referred to as a Web PID controller in this manual However even open loop tension contr
215. rake engage signal After the brake engage delay period BR Eng Dly elapses the system blocks the output This does not function in Torque Control mode ADV 44 45 Output ADV 47 frequency ADV 41 N Output current ADV 15 e 50V 15 ADV 42 gt ae lt gt ADV 46 Motor speed Brake output terminal Operation command J 1 ls ve Brake release section ve y Brake engage section Brake engage section For non vector contro mode settings LSis 57 5 Applied Functions Output frequenc CON 10 Output current gt ADV 42 gt CON 12 Motor speed Brake output terminal Operation command PEERS Brake release section ra Brake engage section Brake engage section For vector control mode settings 578 LSis 5 Applied Functions 5 38 Multi Function Output OnlOff Control Function Setting display Setting range ADV 66 On Off Ctrl Src 1 V1 ADV 67 On C Level 90 00 10 10096 96 ADV 68 Off C Level 10 00 Q Outputcontact s on level OUT 31 33 Relay x or Q1 34 On Off Control You can turn the output relay or multi function output terminal on or off if analog input value is above the set value Select the analog input to use for the on off input in ADV 66 and then de evel in ADV 67 and 68 at which the output terminals turn on and off he ine the respectively If
216. rcentage depending on the conditions Aux speed gain BAS 03 50 indicates G in the following table The value is 0 5 INO1 32 Factory default Assuming that 10 4 mA is input to I1 the frequency corresponding to 20 mA is 60 Hz Therefore aux speed A in the following table is 24 Hz 60 Hz x 10 4 mA 4 mA 20 mA 4 mA or 40 210096 x 10 4 mA 4 mA 20 mA 4 mA LSis 5 Applied Functions Setting type Hz G A Hz Final command frequency 30 Hz M 50 G x 24 Hz A 42 Hz Hzl G A 30 Hz M x 50 G x 40 A 6 Hz Hz G A 30 Hz M 50 G x 40 A 150 Hz E E sz ts Hz M Hz G A 30 Hz M 30 Hz x 50 G x 40 A 36 Hz A Hz G 2 A 50 Hz 30 Hz M 50 G x 2 x 40 A 50 x 60Hz 24 Hz HZ G 2 A 50 30 Hz M x 50 G x 2 x 40 A 50 3 Hz Reverse direction HZJ G 2 A 50 30 Hz M 50 G x 2 x 60 40 300 Hz Reverse direction HZ M HZ G 2 A 50 30 Hz M 30 Hz M x 50 G x 2 x 40 A 50 27 Hz 5 2 Jog Operation Jog operating the Inverter You can jog operate the inverter using the terminal block or keypad multi keys 1 Jog Operation 1 Based on the Terminal Block ace Function display Function settings DRV 11 JO
217. requently when operating the motor at a constant speed select this function to suppress the DC ink voltage and avoid activating the braking unit Excessive operation of the DB unit can burn it out or reduce its lifespan ADV 75 RegenAvd Level Setting the level for regeneration evasion for press Specifies the voltage level for DB operation evasion if the DC link voltage increases due to the regeneration voltage ADV 76 CompFreq Limit Compensation frequency limit of regeneration evasion for press Specifies the variable frequency width for the actual command frequency during regeneration operation area evasion ADV 77 RegenAvd Pgain Compensation controller P gain setting for regeneration evasion for press ADV 77 RegenAvd Igain Compensation controller gain setting for regeneration evasion for press These set the P and gains for DC Link voltage suppression PI controller to avoid the regeneration operation area LSis 59 5 Applied Functions 7 ADV 75 regeneration evasion level voltade DC voltage Vdc ADV 76 compensation frequency limit range Output Frequency Hz Command frequency 1 i D v i ee Status during regeneration evasion The regeneration evasion for press only works when the motor is operating at a constant speed zone no operation during accel decel zone Even operating at a constant speed during the regeneration evasion the output frequency can change as much as
218. ring Do not install a phase advance capacitor surge filter or radio noise filter on the output of the inverter Connect the output side terminals R S and T in the correct order The inverter may be damaged if these terminals are incorrectly connected Be careful Connecting the input side terminals DCP DCN into the output side terminals R S T incorrectly may damage the inverter Wiring or inspection must be performed by a qualified technician Fully install the inverter before wiring Starting the Inverter Do not supply a voltage to any terminal if it exceeds the range outlined in the manual Excess voltage may damage the inverter Usage Do not modify the interior workings of the inverter Disposal Dispose of the inverter according to your local regulations regarding the disposal of industrial waste Recycle all recyclable components contained in this inverter to preserve energy and resources The packing materials and metal components of this product are recyclable in most areas Plastic parts are recyclable or may be burned in a controlled environment depending on local regulations Cleaning Turn off the inverter prior to cleaning Clean the inverter with a dry cloth Never use water or a wet cloth to clean the inverter LSis vii Usage Precautions W Long term Storage If you are not planning on using the inverter for a long period of time store it under the fo
219. rol mode is Sensorless 2 or Vector Note 5 BAS 41 48 only appears when BAS 07 or M2 25 M2 V F Patt is set to User V F Note 6 BAS 50 64 only appears when one or more of the IN 65 72 multi function inputs are set to Multi step speed Speed L M H X Note 7 It only appears when one or more of the IN 72 75 multi function inputs are set to Multi step Accel Decel Xcel L M H 66 LSis 6 Table of Functions Control mode Basic Function Group PAR 3 BAS TER i Change Communication Function Setting during Reference address displa range age Prey g operation pag Note Friction loss 0 Max Bo 0h1250 TR Sed measuring frequency 6 00 o 2 45 x x o x x frequency 1 Hz 81 0h1251 Encore ing reto OS oder o 2 45 X X o x x 1 value 1 Friction loss 0 Max 82 0h1252 meone Sod measuring frequency 12 00 o 2 45 x x o x x frequency 2 Hz 83 0h1253 Frevorp Tig Bieteniess 5 gam 6 00 o 2 45 X X o x x 2 value 2 FricComp Spg Friction loss _0 Max 84 0h1254 Pu Pd measuring frequency 18 00 o 2 45 Xx Xx 0 X x freguency 3 Hz 85 0h1255 Erccompilrad ndenes MESS TOO as o 245 x x o x x 3 value 3 FrieComp Spg Friction loss 0 Max 86 0h1256 a Pd measuring frequency 24 00 o 2 45 Xx Xx 0 X x frequency 4 Hz 87 0h1257 Miecomp Tia Hogan ossa MEC 0025990 IB OLOU o 245 X X O X X 4 value 4 FrieComp Spd Friction l
220. s 8 PLC 59 0h143B Torque Bias Tavebias ioo 420 00 o 5 38 xix o x x amount Torque Torque bias 60 0h143C 0 100 0 0 o 538 X X O X X BiasFF compensation 0 Keypad 1 1 Keypad 2 2 Vi s 3 n pee Speed limit 0 Keypad 62 Oh143D Lmt re setting method 4 V2 o 545 X X X X O 5 12 6 Int485 7 FieldBus 8 PLC 0 Max FWD Speed 63 Oh143F peed Forward speed frequency 60 00 o 545 X X X X O Lmt limit dz REV Speed 0 Max 64 Oh1440 4 Reverse speed frequency 60 00 o 545 XIxX X X O Lmt limit Hs Speed Lmt 65 0h1441 eode Spe d limit 100 500 o 5 45 x x x x o Gain operation gain 5000 Droop 66 0h1442 Droop Perc operation 0 100 0 0 o x x x x o amount 67 0h1443 Droop StTrq Proop start 9 _ 199 100 0 o X X X X O torque Torque mode speed mode 68 0h1444 SPDITROACC Switching 0 600sec 200 o x x x x o acceleration time Torque mode speed mode 69 0h1445 SPDTROACC Switching 0 600sec 300 o x x x x o deceleration time Flying 0 Selection of Str 0 Flying 70 0h1446 SSMode speed search x o lo o x x Flying Start 1 mode 4 Start 2 6 16 LSis 6 Table of Functions Noe Control Control Function Group PAR gt CON Communication Function Setting range address display Bit 0000 1111 Selection of 1 speed by acceleration When starting 2 from reset
221. s described in this manual Do not open the access panel during transport Do not place heavy objects on the product Install the product in the direction specified by this manual This inverter is a precision instrument Do not drop it or expose it to hard impact Theinverter requires a special Class 3 grounding construction Immediately place any detached PCB on a protective conductor if you must remove it for installation or repair The inverter can be damaged by static electricity Do not expose the inverter to snow rain mist or dust Do not obstruct the vents for the cooling fan This could result in the inverter overheating Make sure that power to the inverter is turned off before installation Ensure that all cables are in good condition This will minimize the risk of fire or electric shock Do not use poor quality cables or extend the length of the existing cable Only operate the inverter under the following conditions Item Details Temperature 10 C 50 C Provided no ice or frost has formed Humidity 90 RH or less Provided no condensation has formed Storage 20 65 temperature Environment R There should be no corrosive or flammable gas oil residue Environment dust etc Altitude of 1 000 m or lower vibrations of 5 9 m sec 0 6 g Altitude Vibrations or less Ambient pressure 70 106 kPa vi LSis Usage Precautions Wi
222. shown in Eq 1 7 4 Main speed PID output Hz Main speed PID output 4 vem om e L 1 APP92 Max Main Spd Hz Eq 1 7 Now you can convert Eq 1 6 1 of section 1 6 into Eq 1 7 5 Eq 1 7 5 allows you to compute the final speed Hz of the inverter Final speed Hz Wire speed mpm Diameterx zm Main speed PIDoutpuf Hz J x APP67 Min Diameten 9 Eq 1 7 5 Estimated diametet Code Group number Function Factory default Range Rate of compensation reflected by diameter computation in the final speed APP 89 Compen Xcel 20 0 100 APP89 Compen Xcel As shown in Eq 1 7 5 the estimated diameter compensates for the final output frequency of the inverter Here you can set the rate and response speed where the variations in the output frequency induced by the estimated diameter would otherwise be reflected in the actual output frequency of the inverter LSis 235 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 2 36 3 The lower value of APP89 Compen Xcel values c a 50 or less leads to the lower rate of output frequency variations due to the estimated diameter of the actual output frequency of the inverter and also leads to the lower speed of said variations reflected in the actual output frequency In order to ensure that the inverter operates reliably at a constant speed we recommend setting APP89 Compen Xcel to a value of less than ca 50 Web Functio
223. shown in Fig 1 6 1 Suppose that the maximum flux of this system is 350 mpm and the belt ratio of the 4 pole motor faster motor is 2 3 1 In this situation you use Eq 1 6 4 to compute the value to enter in APP92 Max Main Spd in the following way APP 92 MaxMainSpd 350 mpm 0 10 m x z A poles x 2 3 Belt ratio x 8546 Hz Eq 1 6 4 230 LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 3 Interruption of Diameter Computation Code Factory Group number Function Name default Range IN 65 72 Px Define Multifunction input Web Hold setting Interruption APP 69 Web Hold Freq eauency of 5 00Hz 0 00 30 00 Hz iameter computation APP 90 Min Main Spd Minimum main speed 3 0 0 0 100 0 Do not compute the diameter when one of the following requirements is met the multi function input Web Hold is ON during jog operation when the Web PID is prohibited low speeds below the limits of APP69 Web Hold Freq and APP90 Min Main Spd in Web Break status and in an emergency stop zone initiated by multi function input Web Quick Stop Diameter computation is only meaningful under normal operating conditions Stop computing the diameter in the following conditions e Multi function input Web Hold is On or Main speed command lt APP90 Min Main Spd or Output frequency Hz APP69 Web Hold Freq or e Emergency stop by multi function input Web
224. splays the computed thickness of the web material APP74 Thickness LPF Selects the delay time constant of the material thickness computation APP92 Max Main Spd Inputs the output frequency of inverter when the main speed command is 100 If you know mechanical information such as the flux capstan diameter and belt ratio you can use Eq 2 7 4 to compute APP92 Max Main Spd For example In Fig 2 7 1 suppose that the thickness of Capstan 1 is 0 4 m the maximum flux of this system is 900 mpm and the belt ratio of a 4 pole motor faster motor is 3 2 1 Here the value entered in APP92 Max Main Spd is computed using Eq 2 7 4 as follows APP92 Max Main Spd 900 mpm 0 40 m x x 4 poles x 3 2 Belt ratio x 7643 Hz Eq 2 7 4 LSis 39 3 Capstan Operation 3 10 3 Interruption of The Material Thickness Computation Code Factory Group number Function Name default Range IN 65 72 Px Define Multifunction Web Hold input setting APP 90 Min Main Spa Minimum main 3 0 0 0 100 0 speed You cannot compute the material thickness if any of the following requirements are met multi function input Web Hold is ON during jog operation the Web PID is prohibited at low speeds below APP90 Min Main Spd during Web Break status and during an emergency s op initiated by the multi function input Web Quick Stop because the material thickness computation is onl
225. ss Il Vector operation The inverter and motor must have the same capacity to achieve high performance in Sensorless Il Vector control mode A motor with a capacity that is two or more levels smaller than the inverter capacity could adversely affect the control characteristics If this is the case change the control mode to V F control mode Moreover DO NOT connect multiple motors to the inverter output when operating the inverter in Sensorless II Vector control mode 534 LSis 5 Applied Functions Before performing auto tuning input the following items as stated on the motor nameplate DRV 14 Motor Capacity Motor capacity BAS 11 Pole Number No of poles BAS 12 Rated Slip Rated slip BAS 13 Rated Curr Rated current BAS 15 Rated Volt Rated voltage BAS 16 Efficiency Efficiency Disconnect the load connected to the motor shaft and then select 1 All as the auto tuning item Selecting this item measures the parameters as the motor rotates When auto tuning is complete ensure that the stator resistance Rs leakage inductance Lsigma stator inductance Ls no load current Noload Curr and rotor time constant Tr values of the motor are automatically saved in BAS 21 BAS 22 BAS 23 BAS 14 and BAS 24 respectively CON 20 SL2 G View Sel Select Yes for 1 to set the various gains e g CON 23 ASR SL P Gain2 CON 24 ASR SL I Gain2 CON 27 Observer Gain2 CON 28 Observer Gain3 CON 3
226. ss you adjust the flux the flux mpm remains constant as the actual diameter m of the winder increases over time Thus as shown in Eq 1 6 1 a flux increase exerts more tension on the dancer or load cell This causes the output of the Web PID controller to become negative and the actual speed LSis 225 2 Winder Unwinder Operation of the motor rpm to decrease which decreases the flux in Eq 1 6 1 so that it remains constant As shown below Eq 1 6 2 allows you to use the winder flux mpm which is always constant and the actual speed of the motor lower rpm to estimate the diameter computation This equation assumes that the estimated diameter increases over time Estimated diametexx m o Flux mpm Motor speed rpm Eg 1 62 Next let s take a look at an example of an unwinder With unwinders unless you adjust the flux the flux mpm remains constant as the actual diameter m of the unwinder decreases over time Thus like the winder the unwinder increases the tension on the dancer or load cell as the flux decreases to maintain a constant flux as shown in Eq 1 6 1 However unlike the winder the unwinder internally inverts the output signals from the Web PID controller internally Thus unlike the winder the output from the Web PID controller becomes positive and the actual speed of the motor rpm increases Once again the flux in Eq 1 6 1 increases to maintain its constant speed As shown abo
227. stan 2 identifies the material thickness as 150 ie of APP74 Thickness LPF thickness thickness 96 of the value of Capstan 2 Thus the inverter of This means that the actual thickness of the material handled in Capstan 2 is 8 mm but the inverter of Capstan 2 identifies it as 8 1 5212 mm internally Since the inverter operates 1 1 5 times slower than with the material thickness o 100 this reduces the scale of the tension exerted on the dancer or load cell Thus the Web PID controller output is positive and the current output frequency Hz in Eq 2 7 3 increases In Eq 2 7 3 the estimated material thickness is inversely proportional to the current output frequency Hz so it decreases and converges on a value of almost 100 of the original material handled by Capstan 2 thickness of the web This estimated material diameter is crucial in determining the final speed command Hz of the inverter For more details please see the section 2 8 concerning final speed computations LSis 3 Capstan Operation APP71 Thickness En Selects whether to compute the thickness of the web material When you select No the system does not compute the thickness of the material APP72 Curr Thickness Inputs the initial thickness of the web material in stop status You cannot set this code during operation During operation this code di
228. switching frequency CON 18 and switching time CON 19 settings CON 51 ASR Ref LPF Available in vector speed mode This adjusts the filter time constant of the speed controller reference input CON 52 Torque Out LPF Available in vector speed mode or vector torque mode In vector speed mode you can use this code to adjust the filter time constant of the speed controller output In vector torque mode you can use this code to adjust the filter time constant of the torque command CON 48 ACR P Gain CON 49 ACR I Gain Available in sensorless speed torque vector speed torque mode Adjusts the P gain and gain of the current PI controller IN 65 75 Px Define 36 ASR Gain2 When the preset terminal is inputted you can switch gains after the switching time CON 19 37 ASR P PI Operates while the inverter is stopped The integral controller does not operate when the preset terminal is inputted 5 42 LSis 5 Applied Functions 6 Torque Limit Limit the speed controller power to adjust the size of torque reference You can set the reverse and regeneration limits for positive negative direction operations as shown in the following figure CON 53 Torque Lmt Src Selects the input type for the torque limit You can use the keypad terminal block analog input V1 and 1 or communication options to set the torque limit 0 Keypad 1 1 Keypad 2 Use the keypad to set torque limits You can set the limit to be
229. t 2 Voltage DC Link 3 Vot 4 Torque 5 Watt 6 Idss 7 lass 8 Target Fre Analog Inm 0 07 0h1607 AO2 Mode output2 9 Ramp Freq o o o o o item 10 Speed Fd Teduency 11 Speed Dev PIDRef 12 Value PIDFbk 13 value 14 PID Output 44 15 Constant Web Spd 16 Out 17 Tension Ref Analog 08 0h1608 AO2Gain output2 1000 1000 100 0 o o o o o gain Analog 09 0h1609 AO2Bias output2 100 100 0 0 o o o o o bias Analog 10 Oh160A AO2 Filter output2 0 10000 msec 5 o o o o o filter Analog n 0h160B AO2Const constant 0 100 0 0 o o o o o output 2 Analog 12 Oh160C AO2 Monitor output2 0 1000 0 0 o o o o o monitor 0 Frequency 1 Current 2 Voltage DC Link 3 vot 140 Analog 4 Torque 0 2 Oh160E AO3 Mode output3 5 wan o o o o o fe fal Frequency 6 Idss 7 lass 8 Target Freq 9 Ramp Freq 10 Speed Fbd LSis 62 6 Table of Functions Setting Initial Reference Control range value page mode Speed Dev PID Ref Value PID Fbk Value PID Output Constant Input Terminal Block Function Group PAR 3 OUT Control mode Communication Function Setting durin Reference address display range g page Analog 15 Oh160F AO3 Gain output3 1000 1000 100 0 o o o o o o gain Analog 16 0h1610 AO3 Bias output3
230. t larger values increase the stability Larger values make the PID controller output more stable but the response time may increase APP 29 PID Limit Hi APP30 PID Limit Lo The output limits for the PID controller APP 32 PID Out Scale Adjusts the output of the controller APP 42 PID Unit Sel Specifies the units for the control volume Setting type Function 0 Indicates the value as a percentage without a physical x quantity 1 Bar 2 mBar Pressure You can select various units of pressure 3 Pa 4 kPa He Speed Indicates the inverter output frequency or motor rotation 6 P speed rpm 7 V Voltage 8 Current Indicates the value in voltage current wattage or horse 9 kW Wattage power 10 HP Horse power 11 C Temperature Indicates the value in Celsius or Fahrenheit 12 SE APP 43 PID Unit Gain APP44 PID Unit Scale Adjust the size to suit the unit selected in APP 42 PID Unit Sel APP 45 PID P2 Gain You can use the multi function terminal to change the PID controller gain Setting the function of the terminal block selected in the IN 65 to IN 75 range to No 23 P Gain2 and inputting the selected terminal switches to the gain set in APP 45 instead of the gain set in APP 22 and APP 23 LSis 521 5 Applied Functions 2 PID Control Block Diagram ouenbauj yul JeMO Old ueg jndjno esie u Old mene Gd 18080 18994 Old
231. te B14 4 Warning occurred B13 8 Fault occurred Operates according to the value specified in PRT B12 30 Trip Mode Bit B10 B9 no Inverter operation B8 state B7 B6 B5 B4 During speed search 2 Accelerating Driving at a constant speed 4 Decelerating Decelerating to a stop 6 HW OCS SW OCS 8 Dwell during operation Stop Forward during operation Reverse during operation DC during operation zero speed control B3 ov o leoc LSis 71 7 iS7 Communication Common Areas Communic ation Parameter Address Assigned content by bit B15 B14 Big Operation command source pio 0 Keypad 1 Communication option 2 App PLC 3 Built in 485 BM _ 4 Terminal block 5 Reserved B10 l6 Auto 1 7 Auto 2 Bo Inverter operation 8 0h0306 Frequency command B7 Frequency command source source B6 0 Keypad speed 1 Keypad torque B5 2 4 Up Down operation speed B4 6 Vt 6 11 gg 7 v2 8 12 Bo 9 Pulse 10 Built in 485 pi 11 Communication option 2 App PLC 13 Jog 14 PID Bo 15 22 Auto Step 25 39 Multi step speed frequency 0h0307 Keypad S W version Example 0h0100 Version 1 00 0h0308 Keypad title version 0h0101 Version 1 01 atte Reserved 0h0310 Output current 0 1 a 0h0311 Output frequency 001 Hz 0h0312 Output RPM o RPM
232. ted Volt Motor rated 180 220 V o x oo x o x voltage 15 Oh1COF M2 Efficiency Motor efficiency 70 100 x 16 Oh1C10 M2 Inertia Rt_ Load inertia rate 0 8 0 X 17 M2 Rs Stator resistor 0 9 999 0 x ojo xlo x Leakage 18 M2 Lsigma DS 0 99 99 mH x 19 M2 Ls Se 0 999 9 mH x oo x o x inductance Rotor time 20 M2 Tr Ge 25 5000 msec X O O Xx O X 0 Linear 25 Oh1C19 M2 V F Patt V F pattern 1 Sguare 0 Linear X O O xXx O X 2 User V F 26 OhiC1A M2 Fwd Boost Forward torque sis eges x o o x o x boost 2 0 Reverse torque g 90 kW or 27 0h1C1B M2 Rev Boost boost 0 15 more 1 0 X ojojxjojx 28 ohtC1C M2 Stali Lev S prevention go 1509 150 x o o x o x Electronic 29 Oh1C1D M2 ETH 1min thermal 1 100 200 150 X O O xXx O X minute rating Electronic thermal 30 Oh1C1E M2 ETH Cont csse 50 150 100 X OjJO XJOJ X rating e4 LSis 6 Table of Functions Communication Function Reference address display page M2 Revolution 40 0h1C28 LoadSpdGain display gain 0 1 6000 0 100 0 o z o o oj oj o 0 x1 1 x0 1 M2 Revolution y 4 0h1C29 LoadSpdScal display scale 2 x0 01 0 x1 o m o o oj oj o 3 x 0 001 4 x 0 0001 M2 Revolution 0 rpm a MICA LoadSpdUnit display unit 1 or 0 rpm o o jojo oo Note 50 The M2 group only appear when the 2nd Motor is specified in IN65 75 6 13 Trip mode TRP Current or Last x Setting range
233. ter output wires connected to the motor Auto Tuning Select No 1 ALL in auto tuning BAS 20 LSis 5 Applied Functions 4 Initial Excitation CON 09 PreExTime Sets the initial excitation time You can start operation after performing excitation up to the rated flux of the motor CON 10 Flux Force You can reduce the initial excitation time The motor flux increases up to the rated flux and the time remains constant as in the following figure Therefore in order to reduce the time that it takes to reach the rated flux apply a higher motor flux base value than the rated flux and reduce the applied motor flux base value when the magnetic flux reaches the rated flux Motor Flux Excitation current FX CM LSis 5 5 Applied Functions 5 Gain Setting CON 12 ASR P Gain 1 CON 13 ASR I Gain 1 Sets the proportional gain and integral gain of the speed controller ASR A higher proportional gain increases the response rate of the controller so it is applied to large loads However an excessively high gain may cause the motor to oscillate at speed A lower integral gain setting increases the response rate However an excessively low gain may cause the motor to oscillate at speed CON 15 ASR P Gain 2 CON 16 ASR I Gain 2 You can use a separate control gain depending on the motor RPM to meet the requirements of the load system The gain of the speed controller varies depending on the gain
234. ter to two motors for the switching operation This allows you to operate the second motor when the input of the terminal defined as he second function is 1 as a parameter of the second motor Group Code number Function display Setting display Unit IN 65 75 Px Define 26 2nd Motor M2 04 M2 Acc Time 5 0 Sec IN65 75 Px Define Set the function option of the multi function input terminal o No 26 2nd motor to display the PARM2 group 2nd motor group in parameter mode Set the multi function terminal as the second motor input to operate the motor using the following code During operation the multi function terminal does not work as the second motor parameter even when inputted M2 08 M2 Ctrl Mode does not support V F PG and Vector as operation modes In order to use M2 28 M2 Stall Lev make sure that PRT50 Stall Prevent is set o the desired value In order to use M2 29 M2 ETH 1min and M2 30 M2 ETH Cont make sure hat PRT40 ETH Trip Sel is set to the desired value Code Number Function Details 04 M2 Acc Time Acceleration time 05 M2 Dec Time Deceleration time 06 M2 Capacity Motor capacity 07 M2 Base Freq Rated frequency of the motor 08 M2 Ctrl Mode Control mode 10 M2 Pole Num Number of poles 11 M2 Rate Slip Rated slip 12 M2 Rated Curr Rated current 13 M2 Noload Curr No load current 14 M2 Rated Volt Rated voltage of the motor 15 M2 Efficiency Motor efficiency
235. ter up to 33 00 27 00 Hz BAS 01 AUX Ref Src Selects the input type to use for the aux speed 0 None No aux speed operation 1 vi Selects the voltage input terminal of the control terminal block as the aux speed command 2 lt Selects the current input as the aux speed command 3 v2 Selects the voltage input of the Ext IO option board as the aux speed command 4 12 Selects the current input of the Ext IO option board as the aux speed command LSis 51 5 Applied Functions 5 2 BAS 02 Aux Calc Type After determining the size of the aux speed with the gain BAS 03 Aux Ref Gain use the four primary functions of arithmetic addition subtraction multiplication and division to set the application rate of he main speed Setting type Formula How to calculate the final frequency command 0 M G A M Hz G A Hz BASIO E value BAS03 1 M G A MIHz G A BAS command value x BASOS 2 M G A MIHz G A 1 Main speed command value BASO3 x BAS01 Main speed command value Main 3 M M G A M Hz M Hz G A speed command value x BASOS x BAS01 Main speed command value BAS03 x 4 M G 2 A 50 MlHz G 2 A 501 Hzl 2 X BASO1 50 x INO Main speed command value x BAS03 5 M G 2 A 50 MIHZI G 2 AI 50 y 2 Y BAS01 50 Main speed command value BAS03 x 6 M G 2 A 50 MIHZI G J 2 A
236. the motor when it receives the stop command while operating in torque mode The factory default setting is 0 Torque Select 0 Torque to free run stop the motor in response to a stop command while operating in torque mode When you select 1 Speed the motor decelerates until it stops in response to a stop command while operating in torque mode CON88 Trq Exch Ramp You can issue a torque command in torque mode through the keypad analog input communication RS485 Fieldbus Opt using the torque command source set in DRVO8 Trq Ref Src The torque level in speed mode is computed at a very fast sampling cycle inside the inverter so you cannot change it The automated speed torque switching function causes the motor to start in speed mode and automatically switch to torque mode at a certain frequency CON86 Trq Exch Freq When automatically switching from speed to torque LSis 3 4 Other Functions mode you can apply a ramp time to the difference between the torque level computed in speed mode a value that you cannot change and the torque command in torque mode a command you can issue via the keypad analog input communication This provides a buffer against potential impacts on the load at the moment of automated speed torque switchover 3 External PID Controller External devices can use the PID controller built in to the inverter hereinafter called the External PID Controller In other words you can e
237. the multi function outpu contact is set to 36 Web Break only the relevant multi function output contact turns ON When you issue a stop command to the inverter to decelerate and stop it it releases the Warning displayed on the digital loader and function output specified in 36 Web Break turns OFF he multi APP77 Web Brk St Dly The Web break detection function does not work until the time period specified in this code has elapsed from the initial s inverter since web break detection is not significant during initial si because the dancer and load cell position is unstable art of the artup APP78 Web Brk Dly If the analog quantity feedback from the dancer or load cell is higher than he web break detection level maximum limit AP P79 Web Brk Lev Hi or lower than the lower limit APP79 Web Brk Lev Lo for longer than the time specified in this code the inverter considers this situation a Web Break APP79 Web Brk Lev Hi The system detects a web break when the analog rom the dancer or load cell is higher than the value specified quantity feedback in this code APP80 Web Brk Lev Lo The system detects a web break when quantity feedback this code he analog rom the dancer or load cell drops below the value specified in In open loop tension systems the system detects a web break when the torque he torque limit speed control or final torque command tension control minus the
238. tion If bit 1 is set to 1 and an inverter operation command is inputted then the acceleration starts with the speed search operation A trip can occur if the motor is rotating due to the load when the operation command is input into the inverter for voltage output This can also cause stress on the motor If this is the case you can use the search function to accelerate the inverter without causing a trip When operating the inverter in Sensorless Il mode for the starting load during a free run cycle select speed search for acceleration to assure good operation Failure to do so may cause an overcurrent trip or overload trip 2 Starting on Reset after a Trip Occurs If you set Bit 2 to 1 and set PRT 08 RST Restart to Yes then you can use the speed search operation to accelerate the inverter up to a certain frequency before a trip occurs when you input the reset key or terminal block reset after a trip occurs 3 Restarting after a Momentary Power Interruption If the power returns before the power in the inverter runs out after the inverter input power is cut off and a low voltage trip occurs then the system accelerates up to the frequency before the trip using the speed search operation Set Start Bit 4 to 1 at the same time as the power is input and set ADV 10 Power on Run to Yes If the inverter operation command is on and the inverter input power is inputted then the system accelerates up to the target frequency using the
239. tion 81 0h1751 Virtual DI 12 multi function 11 XCELL 0 None O o o o o o input 12 Communication 82 0h1752 Virtual DI 13 multi function 12 XCELM 0 None O o o o o o input 13 Communication 83 0h1753 Virtual DI 14 multi unction 18 RUN Enable 0 None O o o o o o input 14 Communication 84 0h1754 Virtual DI 15 multi function 14 3Wire 0 None O o o o o o input 15 Communication 85 0h1755 VitualDI16 multi unction 15 2ndSource 0 None O o o o o o input 16 16 Exchange 17 18 Up Down 19 Reserved 20 U DClear 21 Analog Hold 22 LTerm Clear PID Openloop 24 P Gain2 25 XCEL Stop 26 2nd Motor 23 LSis 633 6 Table of Functions Communication Function Group PAR gt COM Communication Function Setting range address display 27 Trv Offset Lo 28 Tiv Offset Hi 29 _ Interlock 1 30 _ Interlock 2 31 Interlock 3 32 _ Interlock 4 33 Reserved 34 Pre Excite 35 Speed Torque 36 ASR Gain 2 37 ASRP PI 38 Timer in 39 Thermal In 40 Dis Aux Ref 41 SEQ 1 x 42 SEQ 2 0 None o ojojojojo 43 Manual 44 GoStep 45 Hold Step 46 FWDJOG 47 REVJOG 48 TrqBias 49 Web Dis PID 50 Web Quik Stop 51 Web Hold 52 Web Preset 53 Web Bobbin L 54 Web Bobbin H 55 Web PI Gain
240. tion of 0 No 08 0h1808 RST Restart startup 0 No 5 54 o o o o o ontrip reset 1 Yes Number of 09 0h1B09 Retry Number automatic 0 10 0 5 54 o ojo o o restarts qoe Automatic restart on Oh1B0A Retry Delay 0 60 0 sec 10 5 54 0 0 00 0 delay time 0 None Motion at 1 Warning 11 oh1B0B terit keypad 9 O None o o o o o command loss 2 Free Run 3 Dec 0 None 1 Free Run Moti it d 2 Dec 12 0h1B0C Lest Gin OETA 0 None o o o o o Mode command loss 3 Hold Input 4 Hold Output 5 Lost Preset v2 Lostoma Time to judge E Oh1BOD rate speed 0 1 120 sec 10 o o o o o command loss Operation sur requency 14 Oh1BOE Lost Preset F SEES ll pater ao o o o o o atspeed Hz command loss Analog input 0 Half of x1 0 Half of 15 oh1 BOF Al Lost Level loss judgment o o o o o 1 Belowxt m level Overload 0 No 17 Oh1B11 ii warning 0 No o o o o o selection 1 Yes OLWam Overload alarm B 18 0h1B12 Level level 30 180 150 o ojo o jo 19 Oh1B13 OL Warn Time janet 0 30 0 sec 10 0 o o o o o Motion at o None NE 20 Oh1B14 OL Trip Select overload 1 Free Run ae o o o o o fault 2 m 21 Oh1B15 OL Trip Level Overload fault 30 200 180 ojojojojo 6 44 LSIS 6 Table of Functions EE Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that only appear when setting corresponding codes Note 47 PRT 10 only appears when PRT 09 Retry Number is set to 0
241. to operate normally in power interruptions of 15 msec or less if used within the rated output If the voltage input to the inverter is 200 230 Vac for an inverter with a 200 V level input voltage or 380 460 Vac for an inverter with a 400 V level input voltage then the system is protected 552 LSis 5 Applied Functions against momentary power interruption and the current is based on the constant torque load current CT load The DC voltage inside the inverter may change based on the output load Therefore a low voltage trip may occur if the momentary power interruption time is 15 msec or more or the output exceeds the rated voltage LSis 5 53 5 Applied Functions 5 20 Automatic Restart Operation 5 54 W Automatic Restart Operation Function display Initial setting range Initial value PRT 08 RST Restart 0 No Yes 1 0 NO PRT 09 Retry Number 0 10 0 PRT 10 Retry Delay 0 60 0 1 0 Sec CON 71 75 SS related E function You can use this function to prevent the system from stopping when the inverter s protection function is activated due to noise or a similar cause PRT 08 RST Restart PRT 09 Retry Number PRT 10 Retry Delay Operates only when PRT 08 RST Restart is set to YES PRT 09 sets the number of automatic restarts If a trip occurs during operation the inverter performs the automatic restart operation after the time set in PRT 10 Retry Delay The
242. uency of the inverter This system offers more consistent control over the winder tension than conventional PID controllers Since the internally computed diameter compensates for the inverter s output frequency once again the Web PID controller uses significantly less of the inverter s output frequency Therefore the LSis 21 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 22 Web PID controller does not risk saturating the output which is effective in significantly reducing the oscillation of the controller output The Web PID controller also offers the following functions Eliminates the transient phenomenon that occurs with the dancer or load cell at start up related code APP51 e Compensates for the inertia of the winder related code APP56 57 Maintains the tension and if necessary performs an emergency stop related code APP82 Detects potential ruptures in the web material in advance related code APP76 80 You must comply with the following settings to ensure that the iS7 properly uses he winder spooler or unwinder or applies them to the closed or open loop system Group cote Function Name Setting APP 01 App Mode Application selection 5 Tension Ctrl 0 W_Spd Close 1 UW Spd Close 3 W Tens Close Tension control 4 UW Tens Close APP 02 Tnsn Ctrl Mode operation mode selection 5 W Spd Open 6 UW Spd Open 7 W Tens Open 8 UW Tens Open LSis 2 Winder
243. up to 200 depending on the rated torque of the motor The following codes set the direction of rotation and reverse regeneration limits CON 33 FWD Trq Lmt Positive direction reverse motoring operation torque limit CON 34 FWD Trq Lmt Positive regeneration operation torque limit CON 35 REV Trq Lmt Negative direction reverse operation torque limit CON 36 REV Trq Lmt Negative direction regeneration operation torque limit 2 V1 3 H Use the inverter terminal block s analog input terminal to set the torque limit Use IN 02 Torque at 100 of the item to set the max torque For example if IN 02 is 20096 and you use the voltage input V1 then the torque limit is 200 when 10 V is inputted However when using the factory default settings for the V1 terminal check the settings in monitor mode if the torque limit setting uses a method other than the keypad In Config Mode CNF 06 08 select No 20 Torque Limit 3 Int 485 Use the terminal block s communication terminal to set the torque limit LSis 5 5 Applied Functions 7 Setting the Torque Bias CON 58 Trq Bias Src Selects the offset value to add to the torque reference 0 Keypad 1 1 Keypad 2 Input the keypad aided setting in CON 38 Torque Bias You can set this code to be up to 120 depending on the rated current of the motor e 2 V1 3 11 6 Int 485 You can set this code in the same manner as the torque reference setting previously described
244. ve Eq 1 6 2 allows you to use the unwinder flux mpm which is always constant and the actual speed of the motor higher rpm to estimate the diameter computation This equation assumes that the estimated diameter decreases over time 226 LSis 2 Winder Unwinder Operation 1 Bobbin Selection and Diameter Initialization Code Factory Group number Function Name default Range IN 65 72 Px Define Multi function 55 Web Preset input setting Multi function 53 Web i enge GARU input setting Bobbin L 7 Multi function 54 Web IN goce Px Define input setting Bobbin H 7 n Current bobbin APP 62 Curr Bobbin display Read Only APP 63 Bobbint Diamtr _ Bobbin 1 10 0 APP67 100 0 diameter APP 64 Bobbin2 Diamtr _ Bobbin 2 15 0 APP67 100 0 diameter APP 65 Bobbin3 Diamtr _ Bobbin 3 20 0 APP67 100 0 diameter APP 66 Bobbin Diamtr PObbin4 25 0 APP67 100 0 diameter APP62 Curr Bobbin Indicates the number of bobbins currently selected 1 4 APP63 66 Bobbin Diamtr As shown below you must use a combination of multi function input Web Bobbin L and Web Bobbin H to specify the bobbin diameter After selecting a bobbin switch multi function input Web Preset from OnOff and initialize it to the diameter of the bobbin selected Bobbin selected Off Off Bobbin1 APP63 Off On Bobbin2 APP64 On Off Bobbin3 APP65
245. vent the motor RPM from increasing excessively Speed control is enabled during speed limit operation so you cannot control the motor torque 1 Setting Torque Control Ensure that the DRV 09 Control Mode is set to Sensorless 1 2 or Vector to activate torque control DRV 09 Control Mode Set the control mode to No 3 4 Sensorless 1 2 or No 5 Vector DRV 10 Torque Control Set the torque control to No 1 Yes Code number Fun n display Setting display Unit DRV 02 Cmd Torque 0 0 DRV 08 Trq Ref Src 0 Keypad 1 DRV 09 Control Mode 5 Vector DRV 10 Torque Control 1 Yes BAS 20 Auto Tuning 1 Yes CON 62 Speed Lmt Src 0 Keypad 1 CON 63 FWD Speed Lmt 60 00 Hz CON 64 REV Speed Lmt 60 00 Hz CON 65 Speed Lmt Gain 100 IN 65 75 Px Define 35 Speed Torque OUT 31 33 Relay x or Q1 27 Torque Dect OUT 59 TD Level 100 OUT 60 TD Band 5 0 In order to operate inverter in torque control mode you must make sure that the basic operating conditions are set as explained in the Sensorless Vector mode or Vector Control mode sections You cannot control the motor torque in the slow speed regeneration zone or at slow speeds with a small load Select the Vector Control mode In torque control mode DO NOT switch the forward rotation command to a reverse rotation command or vice versa while operating the inverter This can cause an LSis 545 5 Applied
246. when DRV 09 Control Mode is set to Vector Control Function Group PAR 3 CON Nee Control mode Communication Function Setting Initial Reference address display range value page Note Torgue i 0h1456 En switching 0 30 00Hz 0 00 x 43 x x a frequency Torque mode 0 Torque 87 0h1457 Trq Exch Dec deceleration 0 Torque x 43 X x method 1 Speed Trq Exch Torque 0 300 0 gs CEES Ramp _ switching lamp sec 50 A 2 Apps 0 None Note ASR P Gain SUA 0h145A ASD RD profile 1 Linear 0 None o 4418 Xx selection 2 Square oi ASRP Pro ASR profile y 25 Oh145B Gain biti 0 01 10 1 00 o 4 13 x x E Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that only appear when setting corresponding codes Note 23 CON 86 88 codes appear when DRV10 Torque Control is set to 1 and DRV 09 Control Mode is set to Sensorless 1 or Sensorless 2 Alternatively it also appears when DRVO9 Control Mode is set to Vector DRV10 Torque Control is set to 1 and the Speed Torque terminal has not been entered or DRV10 Torque Control is set to 0 and the Speed Torque terminal has been entered with the terminal set in IN65 75 Under the conditions previously mentioned however CON 87 and 88 only appear if CON 86 has a value other than 0 Note 24 CON 90 only appears when APP 02 Tnsn Ctrl Mode is set to W Spd Close UW Spd Close W Spd Open or UW Spd Open Note 25 C
247. x DC braking a 16 0h1310 Dc Brake Level quantity 0 200 50 X O o O X xX 17 Oh1311 De Brake Freq DC braking Start frequency 5 go x A ololo x x frequency 60 Hz Dei Start frequency 20 Oh1314 Acc Dwell Freq D ell frequency Max 5 00 x 5 14 o o o x x on acceleration frequency Hz Dwell operation 21 Oh1315 Acc Dwell Time time on 0 60 0 sec 0 00 x 5 14 O o Oo X X acceleration Dwell frequency S 2 t frequency u 22 0h1316 Dec Dwell Freq on deceleration Max 5 00 x 5 14 O o Oo X X frequency Hz 23 0h1317 Dec Dwell Time Pet operation 60 9 sec 0 00 x 5 14 o o o x x 68 LSis 6 Table of Functions ge Reference Control mode deceleration Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that only appear when setting corresponding codes Note 9 ADV 12 only appears when the ADV 07 Start Mode is set to Dc Start Note 10 ADV 14 17 only appears when the ADV 08 Stop Mode is set to DC Brake Expanded Function Group PAR gt ADV Communication Function Setting Reference M address display range page I F 0 No 24 0h1318 Freq Limit Frequency limit 0 No x o o o x x 1 Yes gom 0h1319 FregLimitLo LoWerllmit O upperlimit oso o S o o o x x frequency Hz Upper limit 0 5 Max 26 0h131A Freq Limit Hi frequency frequency Hz 90 90 x o o o x x o No 27 0h131B Jump Freq Fre
248. x x sie PID output 0 No in Oh181F PID Outinv PIDE No x 217 o o o x x Ns 32 0h1820 PID Out PID output 50 109090 30 0 o 217 o o o x x Scale scale InitTns Initial tension 33 Oh1821 AU e tension 0 1 600sec 1 0 o 246 x x O X X qone PID controller 2 lt en Oh182A PID Unit Sei PIC 1 Ba o 519 o o o x x unit selection 2 mBar 6 36 LS1S 6 Table of Functions Communication Function Setting Control address range mode o o Jo o 5 o 3 a gE dz KU ET 12 Note 41 It only appears when the APP 02 Tnsn Ctrl Mode W Tens Close UW_Tens Close and Capstan is set to W_Spd Close UW_Spd Close Application Function Group PAR gt APP Communication Function Setting address display range Lic T T No ka 0h182B PUN Pip unit gain 0 300p4 1000 o 519 ololo x x o x100 i 1 x10 e 0h182C his PID unit scale 2 X1 2 x1 o 5 19 o o o x x a xo1 4 x001 PID 2nd En Oh182D PID P2 Gain proportional 0 1000 100 0 o 222 o O O X X gain s En Oh182E PID 12 Time PID2nd 0 200 0sec 20 0 o 222 o o o x x integral gain T Starting main anes PI Change speed for 0 Pl Change in Oh182F Spat a spo og 000 o 223 o O O X X Switching a Completing 4g PI Change mainspeed PI Change dn 0h1830 Se rend aerea 000 o 223 o O O X X switchi
249. xport the output of the external PID controller as an analog output Basic I O 0 10 V or 4 20 mA Extended I O option 10 V 10 V or 4 20 mA or as communication data This allows external devices to receive the analog output or communication data so the PID controller can control these external devices In order to export the output from the external PID controller as an analog output set the analog output to 14 PID Output in the following way Group Code Function Name Setting Remarks number Out 01 AOt Mode Analog output 44 PID Output 9 10 V Basic 1 0 setting Out 07 AO Mode ioo e 14 PID Output 4 20 mA Basic I O Analog output 10 10 V Out 14 AO3 Mode g output 44 PID Output Extended I O setting h option Analog output 4 20 mA Out 20 AO4 Mode 9 OuIPUT 14 PID Output Extended I O setting option The following list of COM addresses corresponds to the main speed input of the external PID controller and the final output of the external PID controller COM address Function Range R W Remarks OhD85 tur ti 9 0 00 100 00 W Perdu EE A GRE ag e eeu Main speed Upper level A Note OhD87 RPM input 0 DRV20 Max Freq x RPM Ww controller Inverter External PID OhDOE controller output 100 00 100 0076 R Inverter 3 Upper level controller 44 LSis 4 Other Functions COM address Function Range R W marks External
250. y meaningful during normal operation Stop computing the thickness if the following conditions occur LSis Multi function input Web Hold is On or Main speed command lt APP90 Min Main Spd or Emergency stop by multi function input Web Quick Stop is On or Web break detected or Multi function input Web Dis PID is On or APP15 Web PID En is Yes or During Jog Operation S L Fi o o c 8 a a L1 o e Final Speed Computation Section 3 8 21nd Old Pas uren U3 UOISUO Ady mj ZH puewwog X Q pdg eu 4 t aut 990 99 Ssouyo UL 4100 X Tay an ZH 0914 Uten XEN Z6ddY X 9 4 urey xe ld pox 4 unt 5 001 Old pex U N GGddY GGddy gt pds uie ueuy 2 110110 qid X 4 001 4 POS uie GSdd pds urey uau bul 4 1nding qid X 4 ssawru Ki 2H ej uo yesuedwoo uoIS10AU00 10113 i Fig 2 8 1 Final speed computation section Capstan LSis n 3 Capstan Operation The final speed computation section determines the final output command Hz of the inverter using the main speed computed in the main speed command section In3 main speed the PID output computed in the Web PID controller section In4 PID output the error change compensation frequency In1 and the diameter computed in the material thickness computation section In2 Thic
251. ype trip information B6 Reserved B7 Reserved B6 Reserved B5 Reserved B4 Reserved B3 Keypad lost command B2 Lost Command Bi V BO BX B15 Reserved B14 Reserved B13 Reserved B12 Reserved B11 Reserved B10 Reserved B9 Reserved 0h0333 H W diagnosis trip information Be Reserved B7 Reserved B6 Reserved B5 Reserved B4 Gate Drive Power Loss B3 Watchdog 2 error B2 Watchdog 1 error Bi EEPROM error BO ADC error 7 6 LSis 7 iS7 Communication Common Areas Communic ation Address Parameter Assigned content by bit B15 Reserved B14 Reserved B13 Reserved B12 Reserved B11 Reserved B10 Reserved B9 Auto tuning failed B8__ Keypad lost 0h0334 Warning information B7 Encoder misconnection B6 Wrong installation of encoder B5 DB B4 FAN running B3 Lost command B2__ Inverter Overload B1 Underload BO Overload E Reserved ec Oh0340 On Time date 0 Day _ Total number of days when the inverter is powered on Oh0341 On Time minute 0 Min _ Total number of minutes excluding the total number of On Time days 0h0342 Run Time date 0 Day _ Total number of days when the inverter drives the motor 0h0343 Run Time minute 0 Min _ Total number of minutes excluding the total number of Run Time days Oh0344 Fan Time date 0 Day _ Total number of days when

LSIS STARVERT iS7 User`s Manual PDF

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents